diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'po/da')
| -rw-r--r-- | po/da/gpl.po | 395 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | po/da/hardware.po | 1833 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | po/da/install-methods.po | 1176 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | po/da/installation-howto.po | 315 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | po/da/partitioning.po | 810 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | po/da/post-install.po | 543 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | po/da/preparing.po | 1215 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | po/da/preseed.po | 1766 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | po/da/random-bits.po | 1582 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | po/da/using-d-i.po | 2818 |
10 files changed, 12453 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/po/da/gpl.po b/po/da/gpl.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3582cbd8a --- /dev/null +++ b/po/da/gpl.po @@ -0,0 +1,395 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: d-i-manual_gpl\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: debian-boot@lists.debian.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2012-10-24 19:53+0000\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: application/x-xml2pot; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. Tag: title +#: gpl.xml:4 +#, no-c-format +msgid "GNU General Public License" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:6 +#, no-c-format +msgid "[[This note, consisting of two paragraphs, should only be included in your translation if you translate the GPL in this appendix. See build/lang-options/README on how to enable this paragraph and for additional information. Its condition is \"gpl-unofficial\".]] [[LEAVE THIS PARAGRAPH IN ENGLISH! Only replace {language} with the English name of your language. Do not change the link to the GPL!]] This is an unofficial translation of the GNU General Public License into {language}. It was not published by the Free Software Foundation, and does not legally state the distribution terms for software that uses the GNU GPL — only the original <ulink url=\"&url-gnu-copyleft;\">English text</ulink> of the GNU GPL does that. However, we hope that this translation will help {language} speakers to better understand the GNU GPL." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:22 +#, no-c-format +msgid "[[See build/lang-options/README on how to enable this paragraph and for additional information. Its condition is \"gpl-unofficial\".]] [[THIS PARAGRAPH SHOULD BE TRANSLATED. Replace {language} with the English name of your language before translating. Do not change the link to the GPL!]] This is an unofficial translation of the GNU General Public License into {language}. It was not published by the Free Software Foundation, and does not legally state the distribution terms for software that uses the GNU GPL — only the original <ulink url=\"&url-gnu-copyleft;\">English text</ulink> of the GNU GPL does that. However, we hope that this translation will help {language} speakers to better understand the GNU GPL." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:37 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Version 2, June 1991" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: gpl.xml:41 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.\n" + "51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.\n" + "\n" + "Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies\n" + "of this license document, but changing it is not allowed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: gpl.xml:45 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Preamble" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:46 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the gnu General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software — to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the gnu Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:58 +#, no-c-format +msgid "When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:68 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:75 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:83 +#, no-c-format +msgid "We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:89 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:98 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:107 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: gpl.xml:115 +#, no-c-format +msgid "GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: emphasis +#: gpl.xml:118 +#, no-c-format +msgid "TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:121 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">0.</emphasis> This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The \"Program\", below, refers to any such program or work, and a \"work based on the Program\" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term \"modification\".) Each licensee is addressed as \"you\"." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:134 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:143 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">1.</emphasis> You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:154 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:160 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">2.</emphasis> You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:169 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:175 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:183 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:197 +#, no-c-format +msgid "These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:210 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:217 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:224 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">3.</emphasis> You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:233 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or," +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:241 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or," +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:251 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:260 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:273 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:281 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">4.</emphasis> You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:292 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">5.</emphasis> You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:304 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">6.</emphasis> Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:315 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">7.</emphasis> If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:332 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:339 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:352 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:357 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">8.</emphasis> If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:368 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">9.</emphasis> The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and \"any later version\", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:383 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">10.</emphasis> If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: emphasis +#: gpl.xml:397 +#, no-c-format +msgid "NO WARRANTY" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:399 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">11.</emphasis> BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM \"AS IS\" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:412 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">12.</emphasis> IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL AND COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: emphasis +#: gpl.xml:428 +#, no-c-format +msgid "END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: gpl.xml:433 +#, no-c-format +msgid "How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:434 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:441 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the \"copyright\" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: gpl.xml:448 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "<replaceable>one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.</replaceable>\n" + "Copyright (C) <replaceable>year name of author</replaceable>\n" + "\n" + "This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or\n" + "modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License\n" + "as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2\n" + "of the License, or (at your option) any later version.\n" + "\n" + "This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,\n" + "but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of\n" + "MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the\n" + "GNU General Public License for more details.\n" + "\n" + "You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License\n" + "along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software\n" + "Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:450 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:455 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: gpl.xml:460 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) <replaceable>year name of author</replaceable>\n" + "Gnomovision comes with absolutely no warranty; for details\n" + "type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome\n" + "to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'\n" + "for details." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:462 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items — whatever suits your program." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:470 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a \"copyright disclaimer\" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: gpl.xml:476 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the\n" + "program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written\n" + "by James Hacker.\n" + "\n" + "<replaceable>signature of Ty Coon</replaceable>, 1 April 1989\n" + "Ty Coon, President of Vice" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: gpl.xml:478 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/po/da/hardware.po b/po/da/hardware.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c3e0c1251 --- /dev/null +++ b/po/da/hardware.po @@ -0,0 +1,1833 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: d-i-manual_hardware\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: debian-boot@lists.debian.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2012-11-01 19:41+0000\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: application/x-xml2pot; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:5 +#, no-c-format +msgid "System Requirements" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:7 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This section contains information about what hardware you need to get started with &debian;. You will also find links to further information about hardware supported by GNU and &arch-kernel;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:20 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Supported Hardware" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:21 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&debian; does not impose hardware requirements beyond the requirements of the Linux or kFreeBSD kernel and the GNU tool-sets. Therefore, any architecture or platform to which the Linux or kFreeBSD kernel, libc, <command>gcc</command>, etc. have been ported, and for which a &debian; port exists, can run &debian;. Please refer to the Ports pages at <ulink url=\"&url-ports;\"></ulink> for more details on &arch-title; architecture systems which have been tested with &debian-gnu;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:32 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Rather than attempting to describe all the different hardware configurations which are supported for &arch-title;, this section contains general information and pointers to where additional information can be found." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:41 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Supported Architectures" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:42 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&debian; GNU/Linux &release; supports eleven major architectures and several variations of each architecture known as <quote>flavors</quote>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:53 hardware.xml:186 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Architecture" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:53 hardware.xml:186 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&debian; Designation" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:54 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Subarchitecture" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:54 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Flavor" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:60 hardware.xml:192 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Intel x86-based" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:61 +#, no-c-format +msgid "i386" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:67 hardware.xml:197 +#, no-c-format +msgid "AMD64 & Intel 64" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:68 +#, no-c-format +msgid "amd64" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:74 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>ARM</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:75 +#, no-c-format +msgid "armel" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:76 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Intel IOP32x" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:77 +#, no-c-format +msgid "iop32x" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:79 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Intel IXP4xx" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:80 +#, no-c-format +msgid "ixp4xx" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:82 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Marvell Kirkwood" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:83 +#, no-c-format +msgid "kirkwood" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:85 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Marvell Orion" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:86 +#, no-c-format +msgid "orion5x" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:88 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>Versatile</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:89 +#, no-c-format +msgid "versatile" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:93 +#, no-c-format +msgid "ARM with hardware FPU" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:94 +#, no-c-format +msgid "armhf" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:95 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Freescale" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:96 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>mx5</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:100 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Intel IA-64" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:101 +#, no-c-format +msgid "ia64" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:107 +#, no-c-format +msgid "MIPS (big endian)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:108 +#, no-c-format +msgid "mips" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:109 +#, no-c-format +msgid "SGI IP22 (Indy/Indigo 2)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:110 +#, no-c-format +msgid "r4k-ip22" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:112 +#, no-c-format +msgid "SGI IP32 (O2)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:113 +#, no-c-format +msgid "r5k-ip32" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:115 hardware.xml:128 +#, no-c-format +msgid "MIPS Malta (32 bit)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:116 hardware.xml:129 +#, no-c-format +msgid "4kc-malta" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:118 hardware.xml:131 +#, no-c-format +msgid "MIPS Malta (64 bit)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:119 hardware.xml:132 +#, no-c-format +msgid "5kc-malta" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:123 +#, no-c-format +msgid "MIPS (little endian)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:124 +#, no-c-format +msgid "mipsel" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:125 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Cobalt" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:126 +#, no-c-format +msgid "cobalt" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:136 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IBM/Motorola PowerPC" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:137 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>powerpc</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:138 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PowerMac" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:139 +#, no-c-format +msgid "pmac" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:141 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PReP" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:142 +#, no-c-format +msgid "prep" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:146 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Sun SPARC" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:147 +#, no-c-format +msgid "sparc" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:148 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>sun4u</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:149 +#, no-c-format +msgid "sparc64" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:151 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>sun4v</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:155 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IBM S/390" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:156 +#, no-c-format +msgid "s390" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:157 hardware.xml:167 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IPL from VM-reader and DASD" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:158 hardware.xml:168 +#, no-c-format +msgid "generic" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:160 hardware.xml:170 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IPL from tape" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:161 hardware.xml:171 +#, no-c-format +msgid "tape" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:165 +#, no-c-format +msgid "64bit IBM S/390" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:166 +#, no-c-format +msgid "s390x" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:176 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&debian; GNU/kFreeBSD &release; supports two architectures." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:193 +#, no-c-format +msgid "kfreebsd-i386" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:198 +#, no-c-format +msgid "kfreebsd-amd64" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:203 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This document covers installation for the <emphasis>&arch-title;</emphasis> architecture using the <emphasis>&arch-kernel;</emphasis> kernel. If you are looking for information on any of the other &debian;-supported architectures take a look at the <ulink url=\"http://www.debian.org/ports/\">&debian;-Ports</ulink> pages." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:213 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The &arch-title; architecture only supports Intel Itanium processors and not the much more common 64-bit processors from the Intel 64 family (including e.g. the Pentium D and the Core2 Duo). Those systems are supported by the <emphasis>amd64</emphasis> architecture or, if you prefer a 32-bit userland, the <emphasis>i386</emphasis> architecture." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:223 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This is the first official release of &debian-gnu; for the &arch-title; architecture. We feel that it has proven itself sufficiently to be released. However, because it has not had the exposure (and hence testing by users) that some other architectures have had, you may encounter a few bugs. Use our <ulink url=\"&url-bts;\">Bug Tracking System</ulink> to report any problems; make sure to mention the fact that the bug is on the &arch-title; platform using the <emphasis>&arch-kernel;</emphasis> kernel. It can be necessary to use the <ulink url=\"&url-list-subscribe;\">debian-&arch-listname; mailing list</ulink> as well." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:245 +#, no-c-format +msgid "CPU Support" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:246 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Both AMD64 and Intel 64 processors are supported." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:271 hardware.xml:362 hardware.xml:381 hardware.xml:464 hardware.xml:522 hardware.xml:575 +#, no-c-format +msgid "CPU, Main Boards, and Video Support" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:273 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Each distinct ARM architecture requires its own kernel. Because of this the standard &debian; distribution only supports installation on a number of the most common platforms. The &debian; userland however may be used by <emphasis>any</emphasis> ARM CPU." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:282 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Most ARM CPUs may be run in either endian mode (big or little). However, the majority of current system implementation uses little-endian mode. &debian; currently only supports little-endian ARM systems." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:290 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The supported platforms are:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: hardware.xml:297 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IOP32x" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:298 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Intel's I/O Processor (IOP) line is found in a number of products related to data storage and processing. &debian; currently supports the IOP32x platform, featuring the IOP 80219 and 32x chips commonly found in Network Attached Storage (NAS) devices. &debian; explicitly supports two such devices: the <ulink url=\"&url-arm-cyrius-glantank;\">GLAN Tank</ulink> from IO-Data and the <ulink url=\"&url-arm-cyrius-n2100;\">Thecus N2100</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: hardware.xml:311 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Kirkwood" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:312 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Kirkwood is a system on a chip (SoC) from Marvell that integrates an ARM CPU, Ethernet, SATA, USB, and other functionality in one chip. We currently support the following Kirkwood based devices: OpenRD (OpenRD-Base, OpenRD-Client and OpenRD-Ultimate), <ulink url=\"&url-arm-cyrius-sheevaplug;\">plug computers (SheevaPlug, GuruPlug and DreamPlug)</ulink>, <ulink url=\"&url-arm-cyrius-qnap-kirkwood;\">QNAP Turbo Station</ulink> (all TS-11x, TS-21x and TS-41x models), and LaCie NASes (Network Space v2, Network Space Max v2, Internet Space v2, d2 Network v2, 2Big Network v2 and 5Big Network v2)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: hardware.xml:328 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Orion5x" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:329 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Orion is a system on a chip (SoC) from Marvell that integrates an ARM CPU, Ethernet, SATA, USB, and other functionality in one chip. There are many Network Attached Storage (NAS) devices on the market that are based on an Orion chip. We currently support the following Orion based devices: <ulink url=\"&url-arm-cyrius-kuroboxpro;\">Buffalo Kurobox</ulink>, <ulink url=\"&url-arm-cyrius-dns323;\">D-Link DNS-323</ulink> and <ulink url=\"&url-arm-cyrius-mv2120;\">HP mv2120</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: hardware.xml:343 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<term>Versatile</term>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:344 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The Versatile platform is emulated by QEMU and is therefore a nice way to test and run &debian; on ARM if you don't have the hardware." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:363 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There are two major support <emphasis>&architecture;</emphasis> flavors: PA-RISC 1.1 and PA-RISC 2.0. The PA-RISC 1.1 architecture is targeted at 32-bit processors whereas the 2.0 architecture is targeted to the 64-bit processors. Some systems are able to run either kernel. In both cases, the userland is 32-bit. There is the possibility of a 64-bit userland in the future." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:382 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Complete information concerning supported peripherals can be found at <ulink url=\"&url-hardware-howto;\">Linux Hardware Compatibility HOWTO</ulink>. This section merely outlines the basics." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:390 hardware.xml:499 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<title>CPU</title>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:391 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Nearly all x86-based (IA-32) processors still in use in personal computers are supported, including all varieties of Intel's \"Pentium\" series. This also includes 32-bit AMD and VIA (former Cyrix) processors, and processors like the Athlon XP and Intel P4 Xeon." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:398 +#, no-c-format +msgid "However, &debian; GNU/Linux &releasename; will <emphasis>not</emphasis> run on 386 or earlier processors. Despite the architecture name \"i386\", support for actual 80386 processors (and their clones) was dropped with the Sarge (r3.1) release of &debian;<footnote> <para> We have long tried to avoid this, but in the end it was necessary due a unfortunate series of issues with the compiler and the kernel, starting with an bug in the C++ ABI provided by GCC. You should still be able to run &debian; GNU/Linux on actual 80386 processors if you compile your own kernel and compile all packages from source, but that is beyond the scope of this manual. </para> </footnote>. (No version of Linux has ever supported the 286 or earlier chips in the series.) All i486 and later processors are still supported<footnote> <para> Many &debian; packages will actually run slightly faster on modern computers as a positive side effect of dropping support for these old chips. The i486, introduced in 1989, has three opcodes (bswap, cmpxchg, and xadd) which the i386, introduced in 1986, did not have. Previously, these could not be easily used by most &debian; packages; now they can. </para> </footnote>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:431 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If your system has a 64-bit processor from the AMD64 or Intel 64 families, you will probably want to use the installer for the amd64 architecture instead of the installer for the (32-bit) i386 architecture." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:440 +#, no-c-format +msgid "I/O Bus" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:441 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The system bus is the part of the motherboard which allows the CPU to communicate with peripherals such as storage devices. Your computer must use the ISA, EISA, PCI, PCIe, PCI-X, or VESA Local Bus (VLB, sometimes called the VL bus). Essentially all personal computers sold in recent years use one of these." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:465 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&debian; on &arch-title; supports the following platforms: <itemizedlist> <listitem><para> SGI IP22: this platform includes the SGI machines Indy, Indigo 2 and Challenge S. Since these machines are very similar, whenever this document refers to the SGI Indy, the Indigo 2 and Challenge S are meant as well. </para></listitem> <listitem><para> SGI IP32: this platform is generally known as SGI O2. </para></listitem> <listitem><para> MIPS Malta: this platform is emulated by QEMU and is therefore a nice way to test and run &debian; on MIPS if you don't have the hardware. </para></listitem> </itemizedlist> Complete information regarding supported mips/mipsel machines can be found at the <ulink url=\"&url-linux-mips;\">Linux-MIPS homepage</ulink>. In the following, only the systems supported by the &debian; installer will be covered. If you are looking for support for other subarchitectures, please contact the <ulink url=\"&url-list-subscribe;\"> debian-&arch-listname; mailing list</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:500 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On SGI IP22, SGI Indy, Indigo 2 and Challenge S with R4000, R4400, R4600 and R5000 processors are supported by the &debian; installation system on big endian MIPS. On SGI IP32, currently only systems based on the R5000 are supported." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:506 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Some MIPS machines can be operated in both big and little endian mode. For little endian MIPS, please read the documentation for the mipsel architecture." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:523 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&debian; on &arch-title; supports the following platforms: <itemizedlist> <listitem><para> Cobalt Microserver: only MIPS based Cobalt machines are covered here. This includes the Cobalt RaQ, Qube2 and RaQ2, and the Gateway Microserver. </para></listitem> <listitem><para> MIPS Malta: this platform is emulated by QEMU and is therefore a nice way to test and run &debian; on MIPS if you don't have the hardware. </para></listitem> </itemizedlist> Complete information regarding supported mips/mipsel machines can be found at the <ulink url=\"&url-linux-mips;\">Linux-MIPS homepage</ulink>. In the following, only the systems supported by the &debian; installer will be covered. If you are looking for support for other subarchitectures, please contact the <ulink url=\"&url-list-subscribe;\"> debian-&arch-listname; mailing list</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:551 +#, no-c-format +msgid "CPU/Machine types" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:553 +#, no-c-format +msgid "All MIPS based Cobalt machines are supported with the exception of the Qube 2700 (Qube 1)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:561 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Supported console options" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:562 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Cobalt machines use 115200 bps." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:576 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For &debian-gnu; &release; only the PMac (Power-Macintosh or PowerMac) and PreP subarchitectures are supported." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:597 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Kernel Flavours" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:599 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There are two flavours of the powerpc kernel in &debian;, based on the CPU type:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: hardware.xml:606 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<term>powerpc</term>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:607 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Most systems use this kernel flavour, which supports the PowerPC 601, 603, 604, 740, 750, and 7400 processors. All Apple PowerMac machines up to and including the one marketed as G4 use one of these processors." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: hardware.xml:617 +#, no-c-format +msgid "power64" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:618 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The power64 kernel flavour supports the following CPUs:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:622 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The POWER3 processor is used in older IBM 64-bit server systems: known models include the IntelliStation POWER Model 265, the pSeries 610 and 640, and the RS/6000 7044-170, 7043-260, and 7044-270." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:628 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The POWER4 processor is used in more recent IBM 64-bit server systems: known models include the pSeries 615, 630, 650, 655, 670, and 690." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:633 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Systems using the Apple G5 (PPC970FX processor) are also based on the POWER4 architecture, and use this kernel flavour." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:667 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power Macintosh (pmac) subarchitecture" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:669 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Apple (and briefly a few other manufacturers — Power Computing, for example) made a series of Macintosh computers based on the PowerPC processor. For purposes of architecture support, they are categorized as NuBus (not supported by &debian;), OldWorld, and NewWorld." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:676 +#, no-c-format +msgid "OldWorld systems are most Power Macintoshes with a floppy drive and a PCI bus. Most 603, 603e, 604, and 604e based Power Macintoshes are OldWorld machines. Those pre-iMac PowerPC models from Apple use a four digit naming scheme, except for the beige colored G3 systems, which are also OldWorld." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:684 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The so called NewWorld PowerMacs are any PowerMacs in translucent colored plastic cases and later models. That includes all iMacs, iBooks, G4 systems, blue colored G3 systems, and most PowerBooks manufactured in and after 1999. The NewWorld PowerMacs are also known for using the <quote>ROM in RAM</quote> system for MacOS, and were manufactured from mid-1998 onwards." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:692 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Specifications for Apple hardware are available at <ulink url=\"http://www.info.apple.com/support/applespec.html\">AppleSpec</ulink>, and, for older hardware, <ulink url=\"http://www.info.apple.com/support/applespec.legacy/index.html\">AppleSpec Legacy</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:708 hardware.xml:843 hardware.xml:887 hardware.xml:916 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Model Name/Number" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:709 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Generation" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:715 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Apple" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:716 +#, no-c-format +msgid "iMac Bondi Blue, 5 Flavors, Slot Loading" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:717 hardware.xml:720 hardware.xml:723 hardware.xml:726 hardware.xml:729 hardware.xml:732 hardware.xml:735 hardware.xml:738 hardware.xml:741 hardware.xml:744 hardware.xml:747 hardware.xml:750 hardware.xml:753 hardware.xml:756 hardware.xml:759 hardware.xml:762 +#, no-c-format +msgid "NewWorld" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:719 +#, no-c-format +msgid "iMac Summer 2000, Early 2001" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:722 +#, no-c-format +msgid "iMac G5" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:725 +#, no-c-format +msgid "iBook, iBook SE, iBook Dual USB" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:728 +#, no-c-format +msgid "iBook2" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:731 +#, no-c-format +msgid "iBook G4" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:734 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power Macintosh Blue and White (B&W) G3" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:737 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power Macintosh G4 PCI, AGP, Cube" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:740 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power Macintosh G4 Gigabit Ethernet" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:743 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power Macintosh G4 Digital Audio, Quicksilver" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:746 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power Macintosh G5" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:749 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PowerBook G3 FireWire Pismo (2000)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:752 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PowerBook G3 Lombard (1999)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:755 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PowerBook G4 Titanium" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:758 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PowerBook G4 Aluminum" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:761 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Xserve G5" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:764 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Performa 4400, 54xx, 5500" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:765 hardware.xml:768 hardware.xml:771 hardware.xml:774 hardware.xml:777 hardware.xml:780 hardware.xml:783 hardware.xml:786 hardware.xml:789 hardware.xml:792 hardware.xml:795 hardware.xml:798 hardware.xml:804 hardware.xml:807 hardware.xml:813 hardware.xml:819 hardware.xml:825 +#, no-c-format +msgid "OldWorld" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:767 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Performa 6360, 6400, 6500" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:770 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power Macintosh 4400, 5400" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:773 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power Macintosh 7200, 7300, 7500, 7600" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:776 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power Macintosh 8200, 8500, 8600" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:779 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power Macintosh 9500, 9600" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:782 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power Macintosh (Beige) G3 Minitower" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:785 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power Macintosh (Beige) Desktop, All-in-One" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:788 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PowerBook 2400, 3400, 3500" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:791 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PowerBook G3 Wallstreet (1998)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:794 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Twentieth Anniversary Macintosh" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:797 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Workgroup Server 7250, 7350, 8550, 9650, G3" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:802 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power Computing" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:803 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PowerBase, PowerTower / Pro, PowerWave" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:806 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PowerCenter / Pro, PowerCurve" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:811 +#, no-c-format +msgid "UMAX" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:812 +#, no-c-format +msgid "C500, C600, J700, S900" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:817 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>APS</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:818 +#, no-c-format +msgid "APS Tech M*Power 604e/2000" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:823 hardware.xml:849 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Motorola" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:824 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Starmax 3000, 4000, 5000, 5500" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:833 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PReP subarchitecture" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:850 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Firepower, PowerStack Series E, PowerStack II" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:852 +#, no-c-format +msgid "MPC 7xx, 8xx" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:854 +#, no-c-format +msgid "MTX, MTX+" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:856 +#, no-c-format +msgid "MVME2300(SC)/24xx/26xx/27xx/36xx/46xx" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:858 +#, no-c-format +msgid "MCP(N)750" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:862 hardware.xml:893 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IBM RS/6000" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:863 +#, no-c-format +msgid "40P, 43P" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:865 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power 830/850/860 (6070, 6050)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:867 +#, no-c-format +msgid "6030, 7025, 7043" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:869 +#, no-c-format +msgid "p640" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:877 +#, no-c-format +msgid "CHRP subarchitecture (unsupported)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:894 +#, no-c-format +msgid "B50, 43P-150, 44P" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:897 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Genesi" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:898 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Pegasos I, Pegasos II" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:906 +#, no-c-format +msgid "APUS subarchitecture (unsupported)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:922 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Amiga Power-UP Systems (APUS)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: hardware.xml:923 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A1200, A3000, A4000" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:931 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Nubus PowerMac subarchitecture (unsupported)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:933 +#, no-c-format +msgid "NuBus systems are not currently supported by &debian;/powerpc. The monolithic Linux/PPC kernel architecture does not have support for these machines; instead, one must use the MkLinux Mach microkernel, which &debian; does not yet support. These include the following: <itemizedlist> <listitem><para> Power Macintosh 6100, 7100, 8100 </para></listitem> <listitem><para> Performa 5200, 6200, 6300 </para></listitem> <listitem><para> Powerbook 1400, 2300, and 5300 </para></listitem> <listitem><para> Workgroup Server 6150, 8150, 9150 </para></listitem> </itemizedlist> A linux kernel for these machines and limited support is available at <ulink url=\"http://nubus-pmac.sourceforge.net/\"></ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:970 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Non-PowerPC Macs" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:972 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Macintosh computers using the 680x0 series of processors are <emphasis>not</emphasis> in the PowerPC family but are instead m68k machines. Those models start with <quote>Mac II</quote> series, go on to the <quote>LC</quote> family, then the Centris series, and culminate in the Quadras and Performas. These models usually have a Roman numeral or 3-digit model number such as Mac IIcx, LCIII or Quadra 950." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:981 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This model range started with the Mac II (Mac II, IIx, IIcx, IIci, IIsi, IIvi, IIvx, IIfx), then the LC (LC, LCII, III, III+, 475, 520, 550, 575, 580, 630), then the Mac TV, then the Centris (610, 650, 660AV), the Quadra (605, 610, 630, 650, 660AV, 700, 800, 840AV, 900, 950), and finally the Performa 200-640CD." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:989 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In laptops, it started with the Mac Portable, then the PowerBook 100-190cs and the PowerBook Duo 210-550c (excluding PowerBook 500 which is Nubus, please see the section above)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1005 +#, no-c-format +msgid "zSeries and System z machine types" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1006 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Since &debian; Squeeze, support for booting in ESA/390 mode was dropped. Your machine needs to support the z/Architecture, 64-bit support is mandatory. The userland of the s390 port is still compiled for ESA/390, though. All zSeries and System z hardware is fully supported. &arch-title; support software is included from the kernel 3.1 development stream. The most current information about IBM's Linux support can be found at the <ulink url=\"http://www.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/linux390/development_technical.html\"> Linux on <trademark class=\"registered\">System z</trademark> page on developerWorks</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1023 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PAV and HyperPAV" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1024 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PAV and HyperPAV are supported transparently, multipathing is not needed to take advantage of these storage system features. Be sure to configure the devices during DASD device selection. The alias devices will not be offered neither for formatting, partitioning nor direct use." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1040 +#, no-c-format +msgid "CPU and Main Boards Support" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1041 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Sparc-based hardware is divided into a number of different subarchitectures, identified by one of the following names: sun4, sun4c, sun4d, sun4m, sun4u or sun4v. The following list describes what machines they include and what level of support may be expected for each of them." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: hardware.xml:1052 +#, no-c-format +msgid "sun4, sun4c, sun4d, sun4m" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1054 +#, no-c-format +msgid "None of these 32-bit sparc subarchitectures (sparc32) is supported. For a complete list of machines belonging to these subarchitectures, please consult the <ulink url=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SPARCstation\">Wikipedia SPARCstation page</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1061 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The last &debian; release to support sparc32 was Etch, but even then only for sun4m systems. Support for the other 32-bits subarchitectures had already been discontinued after earlier releases." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: hardware.xml:1071 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<term>sun4u</term>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1073 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This subarchitecture includes all 64-bit machines (sparc64) based on the UltraSparc processor and its clones. Most of the machines are well supported, even though for some you may experience problems booting from CD due to firmware or bootloader bugs (this problem may be worked around by using netbooting). Use the sparc64 or sparc64-smp kernel in UP and SMP configurations respectively." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: hardware.xml:1086 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<term>sun4v</term>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1088 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This is the newest addition to the Sparc family, which includes machines based on the Niagara multi-core CPUs. At the moment such CPUs are only available in T1000 and T2000 servers by Sun, and are well supported. Use the sparc64-smp kernel." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1099 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that Fujitsu's SPARC64 CPUs used in PRIMEPOWER family of servers are not supported due to lack of support in the Linux kernel." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1108 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Laptops" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1109 +#, no-c-format +msgid "From a technical point of view, laptops are normal PCs, so all information regarding PC systems applies to laptops as well. Installations on laptops nowadays usually work out of the box, including things like automatically suspending the system on closing the lid and laptop specfic hardware buttons like those for disabling the wifi interfaces (<quote>airplane mode</quote>). Nonetheless sometimes the hardware vendors use specialized or proprietary hardware for some laptop-specific functions which might not be supported. To see if your particular laptop works well with GNU/Linux, see for example the <ulink url=\"&url-x86-laptop;\">Linux Laptop pages</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1126 hardware.xml:1146 hardware.xml:1174 hardware.xml:1197 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Multiple Processors" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1127 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Multiprocessor support — also called <quote>symmetric multiprocessing</quote> or SMP — is available for this architecture. Having multiple processors in a computer was originally only an issue for high-end server systems but has become quite common in recent years even for rather low-end desktop computers and laptops with the introduction of so called <quote>multi-core</quote> processors. These contain two or more processor units, called <quote>cores</quote>, in one physical chip." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1137 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The standard &debian; &release; kernel image has been compiled with SMP support. It is also usable on non-SMP systems without problems." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1148 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Multiprocessor support — also called <quote>symmetric multiprocessing</quote> or SMP — is available for this architecture. The standard &debian; &release; kernel image has been compiled with <firstterm>SMP-alternatives</firstterm> support. This means that the kernel will detect the number of processors (or processor cores) and will automatically deactivate SMP on uniprocessor systems." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1157 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Having multiple processors in a computer was originally only an issue for high-end server systems but has become quite common in recent years even for rather low-end desktop computers and laptops with the introduction of so called <quote>multi-core</quote> processors. These contain two or more processor units, called <quote>cores</quote>, in one physical chip." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1165 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The 486 flavour of the &debian; kernel image packages for &arch-title; is not compiled with SMP support." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1175 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Multiprocessor support — also called <quote>symmetric multiprocessing</quote> or SMP — is available for this architecture. However, the standard &debian; &release; kernel image does not support SMP. This should not prevent installation, since the standard, non-SMP kernel should boot on SMP systems; the kernel will simply use only the first CPU." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1184 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In order to take advantage of multiple processors, you'll have to replace the standard &debian; kernel.<phrase arch=\"linux-any\"> You can find a discussion of how to do this in <xref linkend=\"kernel-baking\"/>. At this time (kernel version &kernelversion;) the way you enable SMP is to select <quote>&smp-config-option;</quote> in the <quote>&smp-config-section;</quote> section of the kernel config.</phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1198 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Multiprocessor support — also called <quote>symmetric multiprocessing</quote> or SMP — is available for this architecture, and is supported by a precompiled &debian; kernel image. Depending on your install media, this SMP-capable kernel may or may not be installed by default. This should not prevent installation, since the standard, non-SMP kernel should boot on SMP systems; the kernel will simply use the first CPU." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1208 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In order to take advantage of multiple processors, you should check to see if a kernel package that supports SMP is installed, and if not, choose an appropriate kernel package." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1214 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You can also build your own customized kernel to support SMP.<phrase arch=\"linux-any\"> You can find a discussion of how to do this in <xref linkend=\"kernel-baking\"/>. At this time (kernel version &kernelversion;) the way you enable SMP is to select <quote>&smp-config-option;</quote> in the <quote>&smp-config-section;</quote> section of the kernel config.</phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1225 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Graphics Card Support" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1226 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&debian;'s support for graphical interfaces is determined by the underlying support found in X.Org's X11 system. On modern PCs, having a graphical display usually works out of the box. Whether advanced graphics card features such as 3D-hardware acceleration or hardware-accelerated video are available, depends on the actual graphics hardware used in the system and in some cases on the installation of additional <quote>firmware</quote> images (see <xref linkend=\"hardware-firmware\"/>). In very few cases there have been reports about hardware on which installation of additional graphics card firmware was required even for basic graphics support, but these have been rare exceptions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1239 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Details on supported graphics cards and pointing devices can be found at <ulink url=\"&url-xorg;\"></ulink>. &debian; &release; ships with X.Org version &x11ver;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1244 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The X.Org X Window System is only supported on the SGI Indy and the O2." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1249 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Most graphics options commonly found on Sparc-based machines are supported. X.org graphics drivers are available for sunbw2, suncg14, suncg3, suncg6, sunleo and suntcx framebuffers, Creator3D and Elite3D cards (sunffb driver), PGX24/PGX64 ATI-based video cards (ati driver), and PermediaII-based cards (glint driver). To use an Elite3D card with X.org you additionally need to install the <classname>afbinit</classname> package, and read the documentation included with it on how to activate the card." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1259 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is not uncommon for a Sparc machine to have two graphics cards in a default configuration. In such a case there is a possibility that the Linux kernel will not direct its output to the card initially used by the firmware. The lack of output on the graphical console may then be mistaken for a hang (usually the last message seen on console is 'Booting Linux...'). One possible solution is to physically remove one of the video cards; another option is to disable one of the cards using a kernel boot parameter. Also, if graphical output is not required or desired, serial console may be used as an alternative. On some systems use of serial console can be activated automatically by disconnecting the keyboard before booting the system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1281 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Network Connectivity Hardware" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1282 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Almost any network interface card (NIC) supported by the &arch-kernel; kernel should also be supported by the installation system; drivers should normally be loaded automatically. <phrase arch=\"x86\">This includes most PCI/PCI-Express cards as well as PCMCIA/Express Cards on laptops.</phrase> <phrase arch=\"i386\">Many older ISA cards are supported as well.</phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1292 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This includes a lot of generic PCI cards (for systems that have PCI) and the following NICs from Sun:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1298 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Sun LANCE" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1303 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Sun Happy Meal" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1308 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Sun BigMAC" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1313 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Sun QuadEthernet" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1318 +#, no-c-format +msgid "MyriCOM Gigabit Ethernet" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1325 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The list of supported network devices is:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1330 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Channel to Channel (CTC) and ESCON connection (real or emulated)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1335 +#, no-c-format +msgid "OSA-2 Token Ring/Ethernet and OSA-Express Fast Ethernet (non-QDIO)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1340 +#, no-c-format +msgid "OSA-Express in QDIO mode, HiperSockets and Guest-LANs" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1349 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On &arch-title;, most built-in Ethernet devices are supported and modules for additional PCI and USB devices are provided." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1354 +#, no-c-format +msgid "ISDN is supported, but not during the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1361 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Wireless Network Cards" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1362 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Wireless networking is in general supported as well and a growing number of wireless adapters are supported by the official &arch-kernel; kernel, although many of them do require firmware to be loaded." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1369 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If firmware is needed, the installer will prompt you to load firmware. See <xref linkend=\"loading-firmware\"/> for detailed information on how to load firmware during the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1374 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Wireless NICs that are not supported by the official &arch-kernel; kernel can generally be made to work under &debian-gnu;, but are not supported during the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1379 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If there is a problem with wireless and there is no other NIC you can use during the installation, it is still possible to install &debian-gnu; using a full CD-ROM or DVD image. Select the option to not configure a network and install using only the packages available from the CD/DVD. You can then install the driver and firmware you need after the installation is completed (after the reboot) and configure your network manually." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1389 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In some cases the driver you need may not be available as a &debian; package. You will then have to look if there is source code available in the internet and compile the driver yourself. How to do this is outside the scope of this manual. <phrase arch=\"x86\">If no Linux driver is available, your last resort is to use the <classname>ndiswrapper</classname> package, which allows you to use a Windows driver.</phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1403 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Known Issues for &arch-title;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1404 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There are a couple of issues with specific network cards that are worth mentioning here." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1411 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Conflict between tulip and dfme drivers" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1413 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There are various PCI network cards that have the same PCI identification, but are supported by related, but different drivers. Some cards work with the <literal>tulip</literal> driver, others with the <literal>dfme</literal> driver. Because they have the same identification, the kernel cannot distinguish between them and it is not certain which driver will be loaded. If this happens to be the wrong one, the NIC may not work, or work badly." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1423 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This is a common problem on Netra systems with a Davicom (DEC-Tulip compatible) NIC. In that case the <literal>tulip</literal> driver is probably the correct one. You can prevent this issue by blacklisting the wrong driver module as described in <xref linkend=\"module-blacklist\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1431 +#, no-c-format +msgid "An alternative solution during the installation is to switch to a shell and unload the wrong driver module using <userinput>modprobe -r <replaceable>module</replaceable></userinput> (or both, if they are both loaded). After that you can load the correct module using <userinput>modprobe <replaceable>module</replaceable></userinput>. Note that the wrong module may then still be loaded when the system is rebooted." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1444 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Sun B100 blade" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1446 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The <literal>cassini</literal> network driver does not work with Sun B100 blade systems." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1461 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Braille Displays" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1462 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Support for braille displays is determined by the underlying support found in <classname>brltty</classname>. Most displays work under <classname>brltty</classname>, connected via either a serial port, USB or bluetooth. Details on supported braille devices can be found on the <ulink url=\"&url-brltty;\"><classname>brltty</classname> website</ulink>. &debian-gnu; &release; ships with <classname>brltty</classname> version &brlttyver;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1476 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hardware Speech Synthesis" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1477 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Support for hardware speech synthesis devices is determined by the underlying support found in <classname>speakup</classname>. <classname>speakup</classname> only supports integrated boards and external devices connected to a serial port (no USB, serial-to-USB or PCI adapters are supported). Details on supported hardware speech synthesis devices can be found on the <ulink url=\"&url-speakup;\"><classname>speakup</classname> website</ulink>. &debian-gnu; &release; ships with <classname>speakup</classname> version &speakupver;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1497 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Peripherals and Other Hardware" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1498 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&arch-kernel; supports a large variety of hardware devices such as mice, printers, scanners, PCMCIA and USB devices. However, most of these devices are not required while installing the system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1504 +#, no-c-format +msgid "USB hardware generally works fine. On some very old PC systems some USB keyboards may require additional configuration (see <xref linkend=\"hardware-issues\"/>). On modern PCs, USB keyboards and mice work without requiring any specific configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1513 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Package installations from XPRAM and tape are not supported by this system. All packages that you want to install need to be available on a DASD or over the network using NFS, HTTP or FTP." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1519 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The Cobalt RaQ has no support for additional devices but the Qube has one PCI slot." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1531 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Devices Requiring Firmware" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1532 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Besides the availability of a device driver, some hardware also requires so-called <firstterm>firmware</firstterm> or <firstterm>microcode</firstterm> to be loaded into the device before it can become operational. This is most common for network interface cards (especially wireless NICs), but for example some USB devices and even some hard disk controllers also require firmware. With many graphics cards, basic functionality is available without additional firmware, but the use of advanced features requires an appropriate firmware file to be installed in the system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1543 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On many older devices which require firmware to work, the firmware file was permanently placed in an EEPROM/Flash chip on the device itself by the manufacturer. Nowadays most new devices do not have the firmware embedded this way anymore, so the firmware file must be uploaded into the device by the host operating system every time the system boots." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1551 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In most cases firmware is non-free according to the criteria used by the &debian-gnu; project and thus cannot be included in the main distribution or in the installation system. If the device driver itself is included in the distribution and if &debian-gnu; legally can distribute the firmware, it will often be available as a separate package from the non-free section of the archive." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1560 +#, no-c-format +msgid "However, this does not mean that such hardware cannot be used during an installation. Starting with &debian-gnu; 5.0, &d-i; supports loading firmware files or packages containing firmware from a removable medium, such as a USB stick. See <xref linkend=\"loading-firmware\"/> for detailed information on how to load firmware files or packages during the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1569 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If the &d-i; prompts for a firmware file and you do not have this firmware file available or do not want to install a non-free firmware file on your system, you can try to proceed without loading the firmware. There are several cases where a driver prompts for additional firmware because it may be needed under certain circumstances, but the device does work without it on most systems (this e.g. happens with certain network cards using the tg3 driver)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1586 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Purchasing Hardware Specifically for GNU/&arch-kernel;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1588 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There are several vendors, who ship systems with &debian; or other distributions of GNU/Linux <ulink url=\"&url-pre-installed;\">pre-installed</ulink>. You might pay more for the privilege, but it does buy a level of peace of mind, since you can be sure that the hardware is well-supported by GNU/Linux." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1596 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you do have to buy a machine with Windows bundled, carefully read the software license that comes with Windows; you may be able to reject the license and obtain a rebate from your vendor. Searching the Internet for <quote>windows refund</quote> may get you some useful information to help with that." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1604 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Whether or not you are purchasing a system with &arch-kernel; bundled, or even a used system, it is still important to check that your hardware is supported by the &arch-kernel; kernel. Check if your hardware is listed in the references found above. Let your salesperson (if any) know that you're shopping for a &arch-kernel; system. Support &arch-kernel;-friendly hardware vendors." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1615 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Avoid Proprietary or Closed Hardware" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1616 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Some hardware manufacturers simply won't tell us how to write drivers for their hardware. Others won't allow us access to the documentation without a non-disclosure agreement that would prevent us from releasing the driver's source code, which is one of the central elements of free software. Since we haven't been granted access to usable documentation on these devices, they simply won't work under &arch-kernel;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1626 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In many cases there are standards (or at least some de-facto standards) describing how an operating system and its device drivers communicate with a certain class of devices. All devices which comply to such a (de-facto-)standard can be used with a single generic device driver and no device-specific drivers are required. With some kinds of hardware (e.g. USB <quote>Human Interface Devices</quote>, i.e. keyboards, mice, etc., and USB mass storage devices like USB flash disks and memory card readers) this works very well and practically every device sold in the market is standards-compliant." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1638 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In other fields, among them e.g. printers, this is unfortunately not the case. While there are many printers which can be addressed via a small set of (de-facto-)standard control languages and therefore can be made to work without problems in any operating system, there are quite a few models which only understand proprietary control commands for which no usable documentation is available and therefore either cannot be used at all on free operating systems or can only be used with a vendor-supplied closed-source driver." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1649 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Even if there is a vendor-provided closed-source driver for such hardware when purchasing the device, the practical lifespan of the device is limited by driver availability. Nowadays product cycles have become short and it is not uncommon that a short time after a consumer device has ceased production, no driver updates get made available any more by the manufacturer. If the old closed-source driver does not work anymore after a system update, an otherwise perfectly working device becomes unusable due to lacking driver support and there is nothing that can be done in this case. You should therefore avoid buying closed hardware in the first place, regardless of the operating system you want to use it with." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1662 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You can help improve this situation by encouraging manufacturers of closed hardware to release the documentation and other resources necessary for us to provide free drivers for their hardware." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1677 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installation Media" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1679 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This section will help you determine which different media types you can use to install &debian;. There is a whole chapter devoted to media, <xref linkend=\"install-methods\"/>, which lists the advantages and disadvantages of each media type. You may want to refer back to this page once you reach that section." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1689 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Floppies" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1690 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In some cases, you'll have to do your first boot from floppy disks. Generally, all you will need is a high-density (1440 kilobytes) 3.5 inch floppy drive." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1696 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For CHRP, floppy support is currently broken." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1703 +#, no-c-format +msgid "CD-ROM/DVD-ROM" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1705 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Whenever you see <quote>CD-ROM</quote> in this manual, it applies to both CD-ROMs and DVD-ROMs, because both technologies are really the same from the operating system's point of view." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1711 +#, no-c-format +msgid "CD-ROM based installation is supported for most architectures." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1715 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On PCs SATA, IDE/ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROMs are supported." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1719 +#, no-c-format +msgid "USB CD-ROM drives are also supported, as are FireWire devices that are supported by the ohci1394 and sbp2 drivers." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1724 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IDE/ATAPI CD-ROMs are supported on all ARM machines." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1728 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On SGI machines, booting from CD-ROM requires a SCSI CD-ROM drive capable of working with a logical blocksize of 512 bytes. Many of the SCSI CD-ROM drives sold on the PC market do not have this capability. If your CD-ROM drive has a jumper labeled <quote>Unix/PC</quote> or <quote>512/2048</quote>, place it in the <quote>Unix</quote> or <quote>512</quote> position. To start the install, simply choose the <quote>System installation</quote> entry in the firmware." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1742 +#, no-c-format +msgid "USB Memory Stick" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1744 +#, no-c-format +msgid "USB flash disks a.k.a. USB memory sticks have become a commonly used and cheap storage device. Most modern computer systems also allow booting the &d-i; from such a stick. Many modern computer systems, in particular netbooks and thin laptops, do not have a CD/DVD-ROM drive anymore at all and booting from USB media ist the standard way of installing a new operating system on them." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1756 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Network" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1758 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The network can be used during the installation to retrieve files needed for the installation. Whether the network is used or not depends on the installation method you choose and your answers to certain questions that will be asked during the installation. The installation system supports most types of network connections (including PPPoE, but not ISDN or PPP), via either HTTP or FTP. After the installation is completed, you can also configure your system to use ISDN and PPP." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1768 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You can also <emphasis>boot</emphasis> the installation system over the network without needing any local media like CDs/DVDs or USB sticks. If you already have a netboot-infrastructure available (i.e. you are already running DHCP and TFTP services in your network), this allows an easy and fast deployment of a large number of machines. Setting up the necessary infrastructure requires a certain level of technical experience, so this is not recommended for novice users. <phrase arch=\"mips;mipsel\">This is the preferred installation technique for &arch-title;.</phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1781 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Diskless installation, using network booting from a local area network and NFS-mounting of all local filesystems, is another option." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1790 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hard Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1792 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Booting the installation system directly from a hard disk is another option for many architectures. This will require some other operating system to load the installer onto the hard disk. This method is only recommended for special cases when no other installation method is available." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1799 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Although the &arch-title; does not allow booting from SunOS (Solaris), you can install from a SunOS partition (UFS slices)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1808 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Un*x or GNU system" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1810 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are running another Unix-like system, you could use it to install &debian-gnu; without using the &d-i; described in the rest of this manual. This kind of install may be useful for users with otherwise unsupported hardware or on hosts which can't afford downtime. If you are interested in this technique, skip to the <xref linkend=\"linux-upgrade\"/>. This installation method is only recommended for advanced users when no other installation method is available." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1823 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Supported Storage Systems" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1825 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The &debian; installer contains a kernel which is built to maximize the number of systems it runs on." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1829 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Generally, the &debian; installation system includes support for IDE (also known as PATA) drives, SATA and SCSI controllers and drives, USB, and FireWire. The supported file systems include FAT, Win-32 FAT extensions (VFAT) and NTFS." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1846 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by the boot system. The following SCSI drivers are supported in the default kernel: <itemizedlist> <listitem><para> Sparc ESP </para></listitem> <listitem><para> PTI Qlogic,ISP </para></listitem> <listitem><para> Adaptec AIC7xxx </para></listitem> <listitem><para> NCR and Symbios 53C8XX </para></listitem> </itemizedlist> IDE systems (such as the UltraSPARC 5) are also supported. See <ulink url=\"&url-sparc-linux-faq;\">Linux for SPARC Processors FAQ</ulink> for more information on SPARC hardware supported by the Linux kernel." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1879 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by the boot system. Note that the current Linux kernel does not support floppies on CHRP systems at all." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1885 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by the boot system. Note that the current Linux kernel does not support the floppy drive." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1891 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by the boot system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1896 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Any storage system supported by the Linux kernel is also supported by the boot system. This means that FBA and ECKD DASDs are supported with the old Linux disk layout (ldl) and the new common S/390 disk layout (cdl)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: hardware.xml:1913 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Memory and Disk Space Requirements" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1915 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You must have at least &minimum-memory; of memory and &minimum-fs-size; of hard disk space to perform a normal installation. Note that these are fairly minimal numbers. For more realistic figures, see <xref linkend=\"minimum-hardware-reqts\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: hardware.xml:1922 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installation on systems with less memory<footnote condition=\"gtk\"> <para> Installation images that support the graphical installer require more memory than images that support only the textual installer and should not be used on systems with less than &minimum-memory; of memory. If there is a choice between booting the regular and the graphical installer, the former should be selected. </para> </footnote> or disk space available may be possible but is only advised for experienced users." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/po/da/install-methods.po b/po/da/install-methods.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c164d8428 --- /dev/null +++ b/po/da/install-methods.po @@ -0,0 +1,1176 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: d-i-manual_install-methods\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: debian-boot@lists.debian.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2012-10-24 19:53+0000\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: application/x-xml2pot; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:5 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Obtaining System Installation Media" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:12 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Official &debian-gnu; CD/DVD-ROM Sets" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:13 +#, no-c-format +msgid "By far the easiest way to install &debian-gnu; is from an Official &debian; CD/DVD-ROM Set. You can buy a set from a vendor (see the <ulink url=\"&url-debian-cd-vendors;\">CD vendors page</ulink>). You may also download the CD/DVD-ROM images from a &debian; mirror and make your own set, if you have a fast network connection and a CD/DVD burner (see the <ulink url=\"&url-debian-cd;\">Debian CD page</ulink> and <ulink url=\"&url-debian-cd-faq;\">Debian CD FAQ</ulink> for detailed instructions). If you have a &debian; CD/DVD set and CDs/DVDs are bootable on your machine<phrase arch=\"x86\">, which is the case on all modern PCs</phrase>, you can skip right to <xref linkend=\"boot-installer\"/>. Much effort has been expended to ensure the most-used files are on the first CDs and DVDs, so that a basic desktop installation can be done with only the first DVD or - to a limited extent - even with only the first CD." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:30 +#, no-c-format +msgid "As CDs have a rather limited capacity by today's standards, not all graphical desktop environments are installable with only the first CD; only XFCE (which is the default desktop environment installed by &debian-gnu; &release;) completely fits on the first CD. For all other desktop environments a CD installation requires either network connectivity during the installation to download the remaining files or additional CDs." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:39 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If your machine doesn't support CD booting<phrase arch=\"x86\"> (only relevant on very old PC systems)</phrase>, but you do have a CD set, you can use an alternative strategy such as <phrase condition=\"supports-floppy-boot\">floppy disk,</phrase> <phrase arch=\"s390\">tape, emulated tape,</phrase> <phrase condition=\"bootable-disk\">hard disk,</phrase> <phrase condition=\"bootable-usb\">usb stick,</phrase> <phrase condition=\"supports-tftp\">net boot,</phrase> or manually loading the kernel from the CD to initially boot the system installer. The files you need for booting by another means are also on the CD; the &debian; network archive and CD folder organization are identical. So when archive file paths are given below for particular files you need for booting, look for those files in the same directories and subdirectories on your CD." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:62 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Once the installer is booted, it will be able to obtain all the other files it needs from the CD." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:67 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you don't have a CD set, then you will need to download the installer system files and place them on the <phrase arch=\"s390\">installation tape</phrase> <phrase condition=\"supports-floppy-boot\">floppy disk or</phrase> <phrase condition=\"bootable-disk\">hard disk or</phrase> <phrase condition=\"bootable-usb\">usb stick or</phrase> <phrase condition=\"supports-tftp\">a connected computer</phrase> so they can be used to boot the installer." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:93 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Downloading Files from &debian; Mirrors" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:95 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To find the nearest (and thus probably the fastest) mirror, see the <ulink url=\"&url-debian-mirrors;\">list of &debian; mirrors</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:100 +#, no-c-format +msgid "When downloading files from a &debian; mirror using FTP, be sure to download the files in <emphasis>binary</emphasis> mode, not text or automatic mode." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:108 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Where to Find Installation Images" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:110 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The installation images are located on each &debian; mirror in the directory <ulink url=\"&url-debian-installer;images\">debian/dists/&releasename;/main/installer-&architecture;/current/images/</ulink> — the <ulink url=\"&url-debian-installer;images/MANIFEST\">MANIFEST</ulink> lists each image and its purpose." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:123 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Thecus N2100 Installation Files" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:124 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A firmware image is provided for the Thecus N2100 which will automatically boot <classname>debian-installer</classname>. This image can be installed using the Thecus firmware upgrade process. This firmware image can be obtained from &n2100-firmware-img;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:135 +#, no-c-format +msgid "GLAN Tank Installation Files" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:136 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The GLAN Tank requires a kernel and ramdisk on an ext2 partition on the disk on which you intend to install &debian;. These images can be obtained from &glantank-firmware-img;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:146 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Kurobox Pro Installation Files" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:147 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The Kurobox Pro requires a kernel and ramdisk on an ext2 partition on the disk on which you intend to install &debian;. These images can be obtained from &kuroboxpro-firmware-img;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:157 +#, no-c-format +msgid "HP mv2120 Installation Files" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:158 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A firmware image is provided for the HP mv2120 which will automatically boot <classname>debian-installer</classname>. This image can be installed with uphpmvault on Linux and other systems and with the HP Media Vault Firmware Recovery Utility on Windows. The firmware image can be obtained from &mv2120-firmware-img;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:170 +#, no-c-format +msgid "QNAP Turbo Station Installation Files" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:171 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The installation files for the QNAP Turbo Station consist of a kernel and ramdisk as well as a script to write these images to flash. You can obtain the installation files for QNAP TS-11x, TS-21x and TS-41x models from &qnap-kirkwood-firmware-img;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:182 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Plug Computer and OpenRD Installation Files" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:183 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The installation files for plug computers (SheevaPlug, GuruPlug, DreamPlug etc) and OpenRD devices consist of a kernel and initrd for U-Boot. You can obtain these files from &kirkwood-marvell-firmware-img;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:193 +#, no-c-format +msgid "LaCie NASes Installation Files" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:194 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The installation files for LaCie NASes (Network Space v2, Network Space Max v2, Internet Space v2, d2 Network v2, 2Big Network v2 and 5Big Network v2) consist of a kernel and initrd for U-Boot. You can obtain these files from &lacie-kirkwood-firmware-img;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:245 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Creating an IPL tape" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:247 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you can't boot (IPL) from the CD-ROM and you are not using VM you need to create an IPL tape first. This is described in section 3.4.3 in the <ulink url=\"http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf\"> Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and S/390: Distributions</ulink> Redbook. The files you need to write to the tape are (in this order): <filename>kernel.debian</filename>, <filename>parmfile.debian</filename> and <filename>initrd.debian</filename>. The files can be downloaded from the <filename>tape</filename> sub-directory, see <xref linkend=\"where-files\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:271 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Creating Floppies from Disk Images" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:272 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Bootable floppy disks are generally used as a last resort to boot the installer on hardware that cannot boot from CD or by other means." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:277 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Booting the installer from floppy disk reportedly fails on Mac USB floppy drives." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:282 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Disk images are files containing the complete contents of a floppy disk in <emphasis>raw</emphasis> form. Disk images, such as <filename>boot.img</filename>, cannot simply be copied to floppy drives. A special program is used to write the image files to floppy disk in <emphasis>raw</emphasis> mode. This is required because these images are raw representations of the disk; it is required to do a <emphasis>sector copy</emphasis> of the data from the file onto the floppy." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:293 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There are different techniques for creating floppies from disk images. This section describes how to create floppies from disk images on different platforms." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:299 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Before you can create the floppies, you will first need to download them from one of the &debian; mirrors, as explained in <xref linkend=\"downloading-files\"/>. <phrase arch=\"i386\">If you already have an installation CD-ROM or DVD, the floppy images may also be included on the CD/DVD.</phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:307 +#, no-c-format +msgid "No matter which method you use to create your floppies, you should remember to flip the write-protect tab on the floppies once you have written them, to ensure they are not damaged unintentionally." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:315 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Writing Disk Images From a Linux or Unix System" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:316 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "To write the floppy disk image files to the floppy disks, you will probably need root access to the system. Place a good, blank floppy in the floppy drive. Next, use the command <informalexample><screen>\n" + "$ dd if=<replaceable>filename</replaceable> of=/dev/fd0 bs=1024 conv=sync ; sync\n" + "</screen></informalexample> where <replaceable>filename</replaceable> is one of the floppy disk image files. <filename>/dev/fd0</filename> is a commonly used name of the floppy disk device, it may be different on your workstation<phrase arch=\"sparc\"> (on Solaris, it is <filename>/dev/fd/0</filename>)</phrase>. The command may return to the prompt before Unix has finished writing the floppy disk, so look for the disk-in-use light on the floppy drive and be sure that the light is out and the disk has stopped revolving before you remove it from the drive. On some systems, you'll have to run a command to eject the floppy from the drive <phrase arch=\"sparc\"> (on Solaris, use <command>eject</command>, see the manual page)</phrase>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:337 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Some systems attempt to automatically mount a floppy disk when you place it in the drive. You might have to disable this feature before the workstation will allow you to write a floppy in <emphasis>raw mode</emphasis>. Unfortunately, how to accomplish this will vary based on your operating system. <phrase arch=\"sparc\"> On Solaris, you can work around volume management to get raw access to the floppy. First, make sure that the floppy is auto-mounted (using <command>volcheck</command> or the equivalent command in the file manager). Then use a <command>dd</command> command of the form given above, just replace <filename>/dev/fd0</filename> with <filename>/vol/rdsk/<replaceable>floppy_name</replaceable></filename>, where <replaceable>floppy_name</replaceable> is the name the floppy disk was given when it was formatted (unnamed floppies default to the name <filename>unnamed_floppy</filename>). On other systems, ask your system administrator. </phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:358 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If writing a floppy on powerpc Linux, you will need to eject it. The <command>eject</command> program handles this nicely; you might need to install it." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:376 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Writing Disk Images From DOS, Windows, or OS/2" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:378 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you have access to an i386 or amd64 machine, you can use one of the following programs to copy images to floppies." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:383 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The <command>rawrite1</command> and <command>rawrite2</command> programs can be used under MS-DOS. To use these programs, first make sure that you are booted into DOS. Trying to use these programs from within a DOS box in Windows, or double-clicking on these programs from the Windows Explorer is <emphasis>not</emphasis> expected to work." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:391 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The <command>rwwrtwin</command> program runs on Windows 95, NT, 98, 2000, ME, XP and probably later versions. To use it you will need to unpack diskio.dll in the same directory." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:397 +#, no-c-format +msgid "These tools can be found on the Official &debian; CD-ROMs under the <filename>/tools</filename> directory." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:410 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Writing Disk Images From MacOS" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:411 +#, no-c-format +msgid "An AppleScript, <application>Make &debian; Floppy</application>, is available for burning floppies from the provided disk image files. It can be downloaded from <ulink url=\"ftp://ftp2.sourceforge.net/pub/sourceforge/d/de/debian-imac/MakeDebianFloppy.sit\"></ulink>. To use it, just unstuff it on your desktop, and then drag any floppy image file to it. You must have Applescript installed and enabled in your extensions manager. Disk Copy will ask you to confirm that you wish to erase the floppy and proceed to write the file image to it." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:422 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You can also use the MacOS utility <command>Disk Copy</command> directly, or the freeware utility <command>suntar</command>. The <filename>root.bin</filename> file is an example of a floppy image. Use one of the following methods to create a floppy from the floppy image with these utilities." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:433 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Writing Disk Images with <command>Disk Copy</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:434 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are creating the floppy image from files which were originally on the official &debian-gnu; CD, then the Type and Creator are already set correctly. The following <command>Creator-Changer</command> steps are only necessary if you downloaded the image files from a &debian; mirror." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:443 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Obtain <ulink url=\"&url-powerpc-creator-changer;\">Creator-Changer</ulink> and use it to open the <filename>root.bin</filename> file." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:450 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Change the Creator to <userinput>ddsk</userinput> (Disk Copy), and the Type to <userinput>DDim</userinput> (binary floppy image). The case is sensitive for these fields." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:457 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis>Important:</emphasis> In the Finder, use <userinput>Get Info</userinput> to display the Finder information about the floppy image, and <quote>X</quote> the <userinput>File Locked</userinput> check box so that MacOS will be unable to remove the boot blocks if the image is accidentally mounted." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:466 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Obtain <command>Disk Copy</command>; if you have a MacOS system or CD it will very likely be there already, otherwise try <ulink url=\"&url-powerpc-diskcopy;\"></ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:473 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Run <command>Disk Copy</command>, and select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Utilities</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Make a Floppy</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>, then select the <emphasis>locked</emphasis> image file from the resulting dialog. It will ask you to insert a floppy, then ask if you really want to erase it. When done it should eject the floppy." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:488 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Writing Disk Images with <command>suntar</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:492 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Obtain <command>suntar</command> from <ulink url=\"&url-powerpc-suntar;\"> </ulink>. Start the <command>suntar</command> program and select <quote>Overwrite Sectors...</quote> from the <userinput>Special</userinput> menu." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:500 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Insert the floppy disk as requested, then hit &enterkey; (start at sector 0)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:506 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Select the <filename>root.bin</filename> file in the file-opening dialog." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:511 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After the floppy has been created successfully, select <menuchoice> <guimenu>File</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Eject</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. If there are any errors writing the floppy, simply toss that floppy and try another." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:519 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Before using the floppy you created, <emphasis>set the write protect tab</emphasis>! Otherwise if you accidentally mount it in MacOS, MacOS will helpfully ruin it." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:538 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Preparing Files for USB Memory Stick Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:540 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To prepare the USB stick, you will need a system where GNU/Linux is already running and where USB is supported. With current GNU/Linux systems the USB stick should be automatically recognized when you insert it. If it is not you should check that the usb-storage kernel module is loaded. When the USB stick is inserted, it will be mapped to a device named <filename>/dev/sdX</filename>, where the <quote>X</quote> is a letter in the range a-z. You should be able to see to which device the USB stick was mapped by running the command <command>dmesg</command> after inserting it. To write to your stick, you may have to turn off its write protection switch." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:553 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The procedures described in this section will destroy anything already on the device! Make very sure that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. If you use the wrong device the result could be that all information on for example a hard disk could be lost." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:563 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Preparing a USB stick using a hybrid CD or DVD image" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:564 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Debian CD and DVD images can now be written directly a USB stick, which is a very easy way to make a bootable USB stick. Simply choose a CD or DVD image that will fit on your USB stick. See <xref linkend=\"official-cdrom\"/> to get a CD or DVD image." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:571 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Alternatively, for very small USB sticks, only a few megabytes in size, you can download the <filename>mini.iso</filename> image from the <filename>netboot</filename> directory (at the location mentioned in <xref linkend=\"where-files\"/>)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:579 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A special method can be used to add firmware to the <filename>mini.iso</filename>. First, write the <filename>mini.iso</filename> to the USB stick. Next obtain the necessary firmware files. See <xref linkend=\"loading-firmware\"/> for more information about firmware. Now unplug and replug the USB stick, and two partitions should now be visible on it. You should mount the second of the two partitions, and unpack the firmware onto it." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: install-methods.xml:589 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# mount /dev/<replaceable>sdX2</replaceable> /mnt\n" + "# cd /mnt\n" + "# tar zxvf <replaceable>/path/to/</replaceable>firmware.tar.gz\n" + "# cd /\n" + "# umount" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:595 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The CD or DVD image you choose should be written directly to the USB stick, overwriting its current contents. For example, when using an existing GNU/Linux system, the CD or DVD image file can be written to a USB stick as follows, after having made sure that the stick is unmounted:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: install-methods.xml:602 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "<prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>cp <replaceable>debian.iso</replaceable> /dev/<replaceable>sdX</replaceable></userinput>\n" + "<prompt>#</prompt> <userinput>sync</userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:604 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Simply writing the CD or DVD image to USB like this should work fine for most users. The other options below are more complex, mainly for people with specialised needs." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:615 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Manually copying files to the USB stick" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:616 +#, no-c-format +msgid "An alternative way to set up your USB stick is to manually copy the installer files, and also a CD image to it. Note that the USB stick should be at least 1 GB in size (smaller setups are possible if you follow <xref linkend=\"usb-copy-flexible\"/>)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:623 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There is an all-in-one file <filename>hd-media/boot.img.gz</filename> which contains all the installer files (including the kernel) <phrase arch=\"x86\">as well as <classname>syslinux</classname> and its configuration file</phrase> <phrase arch=\"powerpc\">as well as <classname>yaboot</classname> and its configuration file</phrase>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:632 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that, although convenient, this method does have one major disadvantage: the logical size of the device will be limited to 1 GB, even if the capacity of the USB stick is larger. You will need to repartition the USB stick and create new file systems to get its full capacity back if you ever want to use it for some different purpose." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:640 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To use this image simply extract it directly to your USB stick:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: install-methods.xml:644 +#, no-c-format +msgid "# zcat boot.img.gz > /dev/<replaceable>sdX</replaceable>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:646 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Create a partition of type \"Apple_Bootstrap\" on your USB stick using <command>mac-fdisk</command>'s <userinput>C</userinput> command and extract the image directly to that:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: install-methods.xml:652 +#, no-c-format +msgid "# zcat boot.img.gz > /dev/<replaceable>sdX2</replaceable>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:654 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After that, mount the USB memory stick <phrase arch=\"x86\">(<userinput>mount /dev/<replaceable>sdX</replaceable> /mnt</userinput>),</phrase> <phrase arch=\"powerpc\">(<userinput>mount /dev/<replaceable>sdX2</replaceable> /mnt</userinput>),</phrase> which will now have <phrase arch=\"x86\">a FAT filesystem</phrase> <phrase arch=\"powerpc\">an HFS filesystem</phrase> on it, and copy a &debian; ISO image (netinst or full CD) to it. Unmount the stick (<userinput>umount /mnt</userinput>) and you are done." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:671 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Manually copying files to the USB stick — the flexible way" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:672 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you like more flexibility or just want to know what's going on, you should use the following method to put the files on your stick. One advantage of using this method is that — if the capacity of your USB stick is large enough — you have the option of copying a full CD ISO image to it." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:687 install-methods.xml:809 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Partitioning the USB stick" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:688 +#, no-c-format +msgid "We will show how to set up the memory stick to use the first partition, instead of the entire device." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:693 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Since most USB sticks come pre-configured with a single FAT16 partition, you probably won't have to repartition or reformat the stick. If you have to do that anyway, use <command>cfdisk</command> or any other partitioning tool to create a FAT16 partition<footnote> <para> Don't forget to set the <quote>bootable</quote> bootable flag. </para> </footnote>, install an MBR using: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# install-mbr /dev/<replaceable>sdX</replaceable>\n" + "</screen></informalexample> The <command>install-mbr</command> command is contained in the <classname>mbr</classname> &debian; package. Then create the filesystem using: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# mkdosfs /dev/<replaceable>sdX1</replaceable>\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Take care that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. The <command>mkdosfs</command> command is contained in the <classname>dosfstools</classname> &debian; package." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:717 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In order to start the kernel after booting from the USB stick, we will put a boot loader on the stick. Although any boot loader (e.g. <classname>lilo</classname>) should work, it's convenient to use <classname>syslinux</classname>, since it uses a FAT16 partition and can be reconfigured by just editing a text file. Any operating system which supports the FAT file system can be used to make changes to the configuration of the boot loader." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:727 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "To put <classname>syslinux</classname> on the FAT16 partition on your USB stick, install the <classname>syslinux</classname> and <classname>mtools</classname> packages on your system, and do: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# syslinux /dev/<replaceable>sdX1</replaceable>\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Again, take care that you use the correct device name. The partition must not be mounted when starting <command>syslinux</command>. This procedure writes a boot sector to the partition and creates the file <filename>ldlinux.sys</filename> which contains the boot loader code." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:744 install-methods.xml:856 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Adding the installer image" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:745 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Mount the partition (<userinput>mount /dev/<replaceable>sdX1</replaceable> /mnt</userinput>) and copy the following installer image files to the stick: <itemizedlist> <listitem><para> <filename>vmlinuz</filename> or <filename>linux</filename> (kernel binary) </para></listitem> <listitem><para> <filename>initrd.gz</filename> (initial ramdisk image) </para></listitem> </itemizedlist> You can choose between either the regular version or the graphical version of the installer. The latter can be found in the <filename>gtk</filename> subdirectory. If you want to rename the files, please note that <classname>syslinux</classname> can only process DOS (8.3) file names." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:769 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Next you should create a <filename>syslinux.cfg</filename> configuration file, which at a bare minimum should contain the following two lines (change the name of the kernel binary to <quote><filename>linux</filename></quote> if you used a <filename>netboot</filename> image): <informalexample><screen>\n" + "default vmlinuz\n" + "append initrd=initrd.gz\n" + "</screen></informalexample> For the graphical installer you should add <userinput>vga=788</userinput> to the second line. Other parameters can be appended as desired." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:781 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To enable the boot prompt to permit further parameter appending, add a <userinput>prompt 1</userinput> line." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:786 install-methods.xml:896 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you used an <filename>hd-media</filename> image, you should now copy the ISO file of a &debian; ISO image<footnote> <para> You can use either a netinst or a full CD image (see <xref linkend=\"official-cdrom\"/>). Be sure to select one that fits. Note that the <quote>netboot <filename>mini.iso</filename></quote> image is not usable for this purpose. </para> </footnote> onto the stick. When you are done, unmount the USB memory stick (<userinput>umount /mnt</userinput>)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:810 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Most USB sticks do not come pre-configured in such a way that Open Firmware can boot from them, so you will need to repartition the stick. On Mac systems, run <userinput>mac-fdisk /dev/<replaceable>sdX</replaceable></userinput>, initialise a new partition map using the <userinput>i</userinput> command, and create a new partition of type Apple_Bootstrap using the <userinput>C</userinput> command. (Note that the first \"partition\" will always be the partition map itself.) Then type <informalexample><screen>\n" + "$ hformat /dev/<replaceable>sdX2</replaceable>\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Take care that you use the correct device name for your USB stick. The <command>hformat</command> command is contained in the <classname>hfsutils</classname> &debian; package." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:827 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In order to start the kernel after booting from the USB stick, we will put a boot loader on the stick. The <command>yaboot</command> boot loader can be installed on an HFS filesystem and can be reconfigured by just editing a text file. Any operating system which supports the HFS file system can be used to make changes to the configuration of the boot loader." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:836 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "The normal <command>ybin</command> tool that comes with <command>yaboot</command> does not yet understand USB storage devices, so you will have to install <command>yaboot</command> by hand using the <classname>hfsutils</classname> tools. Type <informalexample><screen>\n" + "$ hmount /dev/<replaceable>sdX2</replaceable>\n" + "$ hcopy -r /usr/lib/yaboot/yaboot :\n" + "$ hattrib -c UNIX -t tbxi :yaboot\n" + "$ hattrib -b :\n" + "$ humount\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Again, take care that you use the correct device name. The partition must not be otherwise mounted during this procedure. This procedure writes the boot loader to the partition, and uses the HFS utilities to mark it in such a way that Open Firmware will boot it. Having done this, the rest of the USB stick may be prepared using the normal Unix utilities." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:857 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Mount the partition (<userinput>mount /dev/<replaceable>sdX2</replaceable> /mnt</userinput>) and copy the following installer image files to the stick:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:864 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>vmlinux</filename> (kernel binary)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:869 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>initrd.gz</filename> (initial ramdisk image)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:874 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>yaboot.conf</filename> (yaboot configuration file)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:879 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>boot.msg</filename> (optional boot message)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:886 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "The <filename>yaboot.conf</filename> configuration file should contain the following lines: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "default=install\n" + "root=/dev/ram\n" + "\n" + "message=/boot.msg\n" + "\n" + "image=/vmlinux\n" + " label=install\n" + " initrd=/initrd.gz\n" + " initrd-size=10000\n" + " read-only\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Please note that the <userinput>initrd-size</userinput> parameter may need to be increased, depending on the image you are booting." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:924 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Preparing Files for Hard Disk Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:925 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The installer may be booted using boot files placed on an existing hard drive partition, either launched from another operating system or by invoking a boot loader directly from the BIOS." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:931 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A full, <quote>pure network</quote> installation can be achieved using this technique. This avoids all hassles of removable media, like finding and burning CD images or struggling with too numerous and unreliable floppy disks." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:938 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The installer cannot boot from files on an HFS+ file system. MacOS System 8.1 and above may use HFS+ file systems; NewWorld PowerMacs all use HFS+. To determine whether your existing file system is HFS+, select <userinput>Get Info</userinput> for the volume in question. HFS file systems appear as <userinput>Mac OS Standard</userinput>, while HFS+ file systems say <userinput>Mac OS Extended</userinput>. You must have an HFS partition in order to exchange files between MacOS and Linux, in particular the installation files you download." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:949 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Different programs are used for hard disk installation system booting, depending on whether the system is a <quote>NewWorld</quote> or an <quote>OldWorld</quote> model." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:958 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hard disk installer booting using <command>LILO</command> or <command>GRUB</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:960 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This section explains how to add to or even replace an existing linux installation using either <command>LILO</command> or <command>GRUB</command>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:966 +#, no-c-format +msgid "At boot time, both bootloaders support loading in memory not only the kernel, but also a disk image. This RAM disk can be used as the root file-system by the kernel." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:972 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Copy the following files from the &debian; archives to a convenient location on your hard drive (note that LILO can not boot from files on an NTFS file system), for instance to <filename>/boot/newinstall/</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:980 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>vmlinuz</filename> (kernel binary)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:985 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>initrd.gz</filename> (ramdisk image)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:992 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Finally, to configure the bootloader proceed to <xref linkend=\"boot-initrd\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:1002 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hard disk installer booting using <command>loadlin</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1003 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This section explains how to prepare your hard drive for booting the installer from DOS using <command>loadlin</command>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1008 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Copy the following directories from a &debian; CD image to <filename>c:\\</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1013 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>/&x86-install-dir;</filename> (kernel binary and ramdisk image)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1018 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>/tools</filename> (loadlin tool)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:1031 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hard Disk Installer Booting for OldWorld Macs" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1032 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The <filename>boot-floppy-hfs</filename> floppy uses <application>miBoot</application> to launch Linux installation, but <application>miBoot</application> cannot easily be used for hard disk booting. <application>BootX</application>, launched from MacOS, supports booting from files placed on the hard disk. <application>BootX</application> can also be used to dual-boot MacOS and Linux after your &debian; installation is complete. For the Performa 6360, it appears that <command>quik</command> cannot make the hard disk bootable. So <application>BootX</application> is required on that model." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1045 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Download and unstuff the <application>BootX</application> distribution, available from <ulink url=\"&url-powerpc-bootx;\"></ulink>, or in the <filename>dists/woody/main/disks-powerpc/current/powermac</filename> directory on &debian; http/ftp mirrors and official &debian; CDs. Use <application>Stuffit Expander</application> to extract it from its archive. Within the package, there is an empty folder called <filename>Linux Kernels</filename>. Download <filename>linux.bin</filename> and <filename>ramdisk.image.gz</filename> from the <filename>disks-powerpc/current/powermac</filename> folder, and place them in the <filename>Linux Kernels</filename> folder. Then place the <filename>Linux Kernels</filename> folder in the active System Folder." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:1065 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hard Disk Installer Booting for NewWorld Macs" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1066 +#, no-c-format +msgid "NewWorld PowerMacs support booting from a network or an ISO9660 CD-ROM, as well as loading ELF binaries directly from the hard disk. These machines will boot Linux directly via <command>yaboot</command>, which supports loading a kernel and RAMdisk directly from an ext2 partition, as well as dual-booting with MacOS. Hard disk booting of the installer is particularly appropriate for newer machines without floppy drives. <command>BootX</command> is not supported and must not be used on NewWorld PowerMacs." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1077 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis>Copy</emphasis> (not move) the following four files which you downloaded earlier from the &debian; archives, onto the root level of your hard drive (this can be accomplished by <keycap>option</keycap>-dragging each file to the hard drive icon)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: install-methods.xml:1087 install-methods.xml:1413 +#, no-c-format +msgid "vmlinux" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: install-methods.xml:1092 install-methods.xml:1418 +#, no-c-format +msgid "initrd.gz" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: install-methods.xml:1097 install-methods.xml:1423 +#, no-c-format +msgid "yaboot" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: install-methods.xml:1102 install-methods.xml:1428 +#, no-c-format +msgid "yaboot.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1107 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Make a note of the partition number of the MacOS partition where you place these files. If you have the MacOS <command>pdisk</command> program, you can use the <command>L</command> command to check for the partition number. You will need this partition number for the command you type at the Open Firmware prompt when you boot the installer." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1115 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To boot the installer, proceed to <xref linkend=\"boot-newworld\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:1128 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Preparing Files for TFTP Net Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1129 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If your machine is connected to a local area network, you may be able to boot it over the network from another machine, using TFTP. If you intend to boot the installation system from another machine, the boot files will need to be placed in specific locations on that machine, and the machine configured to support booting of your specific machine." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1137 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You need to set up a TFTP server, and for many machines a DHCP server<phrase condition=\"supports-rarp\">, or RARP server</phrase><phrase condition=\"supports-bootp\">, or BOOTP server</phrase>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1144 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<phrase condition=\"supports-rarp\">The Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP) is one way to tell your client what IP address to use for itself. Another way is to use the BOOTP protocol.</phrase> <phrase condition=\"supports-bootp\">BOOTP is an IP protocol that informs a computer of its IP address and where on the network to obtain a boot image.</phrase> The DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a more flexible, backwards-compatible extension of BOOTP. Some systems can only be configured via DHCP." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1158 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For PowerPC, if you have a NewWorld Power Macintosh machine, it is a good idea to use DHCP instead of BOOTP. Some of the latest machines are unable to boot using BOOTP." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1164 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Some older HPPA machines (e.g. 715/75) use RBOOTD rather than BOOTP. There is an <classname>rbootd</classname> package available in &debian;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1169 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is used to serve the boot image to the client. Theoretically, any server, on any platform, which implements these protocols, may be used. In the examples in this section, we shall provide commands for SunOS 4.x, SunOS 5.x (a.k.a. Solaris), and GNU/Linux." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1177 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For a &debian-gnu; server we recommend <classname>tftpd-hpa</classname>. It's written by the same author as the <classname>syslinux</classname> bootloader and is therefore least likely to cause issues. A good alternative is <classname>atftpd</classname>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:1193 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Setting up RARP server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1194 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To set up RARP, you need to know the Ethernet address (a.k.a. the MAC address) of the client computers to be installed. If you don't know this information, you can <phrase arch=\"sparc\"> pick it off the initial OpenPROM boot messages, use the OpenBoot <userinput>.enet-addr</userinput> command, or </phrase> boot into <quote>Rescue</quote> mode (e.g., from the rescue floppy) and use the command <userinput>ip addr show dev eth0</userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1206 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On a RARP server system using a Linux 2.4 or 2.6 kernel, or Solaris/SunOS, you use the <command>rarpd</command> program. You need to ensure that the Ethernet hardware address for the client is listed in the <quote>ethers</quote> database (either in the <filename>/etc/ethers</filename> file, or via NIS/NIS+) and in the <quote>hosts</quote> database. Then you need to start the RARP daemon. Issue the command (as root): <userinput>/usr/sbin/rarpd -a</userinput> on most Linux systems and SunOS 5 (Solaris 2), <userinput>/usr/sbin/in.rarpd -a</userinput> on some other Linux systems, or <userinput>/usr/etc/rarpd -a</userinput> in SunOS 4 (Solaris 1)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:1227 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Setting up a DHCP server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1228 +#, no-c-format +msgid "One free software DHCP server is ISC <command>dhcpd</command>. For &debian-gnu;, the <classname>dhcp3-server</classname> package is recommended. Here is a sample configuration file for it (see <filename>/etc/dhcp3/dhcpd.conf</filename>):" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: install-methods.xml:1235 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "option domain-name \"example.com\";\n" + "option domain-name-servers ns1.example.com;\n" + "option subnet-mask 255.255.255.0;\n" + "default-lease-time 600;\n" + "max-lease-time 7200;\n" + "server-name \"servername\";\n" + "\n" + "subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {\n" + " range 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.253;\n" + " option routers 192.168.1.1;\n" + "}\n" + "\n" + "host clientname {\n" + " filename \"/tftpboot.img\";\n" + " server-name \"servername\";\n" + " next-server servername;\n" + " hardware ethernet 01:23:45:67:89:AB;\n" + " fixed-address 192.168.1.90;\n" + "}" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1237 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In this example, there is one server <replaceable>servername</replaceable> which performs all of the work of DHCP server, TFTP server, and network gateway. You will almost certainly need to change the domain-name options, as well as the server name and client hardware address. The <replaceable>filename</replaceable> option should be the name of the file which will be retrieved via TFTP." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1247 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After you have edited the <command>dhcpd</command> configuration file, restart it with <userinput>/etc/init.d/dhcp3-server restart</userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:1255 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Enabling PXE Booting in the DHCP configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1256 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Here is another example for a <filename>dhcp.conf</filename> using the Pre-boot Execution Environment (PXE) method of TFTP. <informalexample><screen>\n" + "option domain-name \"example.com\";\n" + "\n" + "default-lease-time 600;\n" + "max-lease-time 7200;\n" + "\n" + "allow booting;\n" + "allow bootp;\n" + "\n" + "# The next paragraph needs to be modified to fit your case\n" + "subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {\n" + " range 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.253;\n" + " option broadcast-address 192.168.1.255;\n" + "# the gateway address which can be different\n" + "# (access to the internet for instance)\n" + " option routers 192.168.1.1;\n" + "# indicate the dns you want to use\n" + " option domain-name-servers 192.168.1.3;\n" + "}\n" + "\n" + "group {\n" + " next-server 192.168.1.3;\n" + " host tftpclient {\n" + "# tftp client hardware address\n" + " hardware ethernet 00:10:DC:27:6C:15;\n" + " filename \"pxelinux.0\";\n" + " }\n" + "}\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Note that for PXE booting, the client filename <filename>pxelinux.0</filename> is a boot loader, not a kernel image (see <xref linkend=\"tftp-images\"/> below)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:1276 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Setting up a BOOTP server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1277 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There are two BOOTP servers available for GNU/Linux. The first is CMU <command>bootpd</command>. The other is actually a DHCP server: ISC <command>dhcpd</command>. In &debian-gnu; these are contained in the <classname>bootp</classname> and <classname>dhcp3-server</classname> packages respectively." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1285 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "To use CMU <command>bootpd</command>, you must first uncomment (or add) the relevant line in <filename>/etc/inetd.conf</filename>. On &debian-gnu;, you can run <userinput>update-inetd --enable bootps</userinput>, then <userinput>/etc/init.d/inetd reload</userinput> to do so. Just in case your BOOTP server does not run &debian;, the line in question should look like: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "bootps dgram udp wait root /usr/sbin/bootpd bootpd -i -t 120\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Now, you must create an <filename>/etc/bootptab</filename> file. This has the same sort of familiar and cryptic format as the good old BSD <filename>printcap</filename>, <filename>termcap</filename>, and <filename>disktab</filename> files. See the <filename>bootptab</filename> manual page for more information. For CMU <command>bootpd</command>, you will need to know the hardware (MAC) address of the client. Here is an example <filename>/etc/bootptab</filename>: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "client:\\\n" + " hd=/tftpboot:\\\n" + " bf=tftpboot.img:\\\n" + " ip=192.168.1.90:\\\n" + " sm=255.255.255.0:\\\n" + " sa=192.168.1.1:\\\n" + " ha=0123456789AB:\n" + "</screen></informalexample> You will need to change at least the <quote>ha</quote> option, which specifies the hardware address of the client. The <quote>bf</quote> option specifies the file a client should retrieve via TFTP; see <xref linkend=\"tftp-images\"/> for more details. <phrase arch=\"mips\"> On SGI machines you can just enter the command monitor and type <userinput>printenv</userinput>. The value of the <userinput>eaddr</userinput> variable is the machine's MAC address. </phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1318 +#, no-c-format +msgid "By contrast, setting up BOOTP with ISC <command>dhcpd</command> is really easy, because it treats BOOTP clients as a moderately special case of DHCP clients. Some architectures require a complex configuration for booting clients via BOOTP. If yours is one of those, read the section <xref linkend=\"dhcpd\"/>. Otherwise you will probably be able to get away with simply adding the <userinput>allow bootp</userinput> directive to the configuration block for the subnet containing the client in <filename>/etc/dhcp3/dhcpd.conf</filename>, and restart <command>dhcpd</command> with <userinput>/etc/init.d/dhcp3-server restart</userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:1337 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Enabling the TFTP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1338 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To get the TFTP server ready to go, you should first make sure that <command>tftpd</command> is enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1343 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In the case of <classname>tftpd-hpa</classname> there are two ways the service can be run. It can be started on demand by the system's <classname>inetd</classname> daemon, or it can be set up to run as an independent daemon. Which of these methods is used is selected when the package is installed and can be changed by reconfiguring the package." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1352 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Historically, TFTP servers used <filename>/tftpboot</filename> as directory to serve images from. However, &debian-gnu; packages may use other directories to comply with the <ulink url=\"&url-fhs-home;\">Filesystem Hierarchy Standard</ulink>. For example, <classname>tftpd-hpa</classname> by default uses <filename>/srv/tftp</filename>. You may have to adjust the configuration examples in this section accordingly." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1362 +#, no-c-format +msgid "All <command>in.tftpd</command> alternatives available in &debian; should log TFTP requests to the system logs by default. Some of them support a <userinput>-v</userinput> argument to increase verbosity. It is recommended to check these log messages in case of boot problems as they are a good starting point for diagnosing the cause of errors." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1370 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "If you intend to install &debian; on an SGI machine and your TFTP server is a GNU/Linux box running Linux 2.4, you'll need to set the following on your server: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_no_pmtu_disc\n" + "</screen></informalexample> to turn off Path MTU discovery, otherwise the SGI's PROM can't download the kernel. Furthermore, make sure TFTP packets are sent from a source port no greater than 32767, or the download will stall after the first packet. Again, it's Linux 2.4.X tripping this bug in the PROM, and you can avoid it by setting <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# echo \"2048 32767\" > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_local_port_range\n" + "</screen></informalexample> to adjust the range of source ports the Linux TFTP server uses." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:1392 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Move TFTP Images Into Place" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1393 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Next, place the TFTP boot image you need, as found in <xref linkend=\"where-files\"/>, in the <command>tftpd</command> boot image directory. You may have to make a link from that file to the file which <command>tftpd</command> will use for booting a particular client. Unfortunately, the file name is determined by the TFTP client, and there are no strong standards." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1402 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On NewWorld Power Macintosh machines, you will need to set up the <command>yaboot</command> boot loader as the TFTP boot image. <command>Yaboot</command> will then retrieve the kernel and RAMdisk images via TFTP itself. You will need to download the following files from the <filename>netboot/</filename> directory:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: install-methods.xml:1433 +#, no-c-format +msgid "boot.msg" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1438 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For PXE booting, everything you should need is set up in the <filename>netboot/netboot.tar.gz</filename> tarball. Simply extract this tarball into the <command>tftpd</command> boot image directory. Make sure your dhcp server is configured to pass <filename>pxelinux.0</filename> to <command>tftpd</command> as the filename to boot." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1446 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For PXE booting, everything you should need is set up in the <filename>netboot/netboot.tar.gz</filename> tarball. Simply extract this tarball into the <command>tftpd</command> boot image directory. Make sure your dhcp server is configured to pass <filename>/debian-installer/ia64/elilo.efi</filename> to <command>tftpd</command> as the filename to boot." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:1458 +#, no-c-format +msgid "SPARC TFTP Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1459 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Some SPARC architectures add the subarchitecture names, such as <quote>SUN4M</quote> or <quote>SUN4C</quote>, to the filename. Thus, if your system's subarchitecture is a SUN4C, and its IP is 192.168.1.3, the filename would be <filename>C0A80103.SUN4C</filename>. However, there are also subarchitectures where the file the client looks for is just <filename>client-ip-in-hex</filename>. An easy way to determine the hexadecimal code for the IP address is to enter the following command in a shell (assuming the machine's intended IP is 10.0.0.4). <informalexample><screen>\n" + "$ printf '%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x\\n' 10 0 0 4\n" + "</screen></informalexample> To get to the correct filename, you will need to change all letters to uppercase and if necessary append the subarchitecture name." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1475 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you've done all this correctly, giving the command <userinput>boot net</userinput> from the OpenPROM should load the image. If the image cannot be found, try checking the logs on your tftp server to see which image name is being requested." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1482 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You can also force some sparc systems to look for a specific file name by adding it to the end of the OpenPROM boot command, such as <userinput>boot net my-sparc.image</userinput>. This must still reside in the directory that the TFTP server looks in." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:1493 +#, no-c-format +msgid "SGI TFTP Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1494 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On SGI machines you can rely on the <command>bootpd</command> to supply the name of the TFTP file. It is given either as the <userinput>bf=</userinput> in <filename>/etc/bootptab</filename> or as the <userinput>filename=</userinput> option in <filename>/etc/dhcpd.conf</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:1602 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Automatic Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1603 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For installing on multiple computers it's possible to do fully automatic installations. &debian; packages intended for this include <classname>fai-quickstart</classname> (which can use an install server) and the &debian; Installer itself. Have a look at the <ulink url=\"http://fai-project.org\">FAI home page</ulink> for detailed information." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: install-methods.xml:1615 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Automatic Installation Using the &debian; Installer" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1616 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The &debian; Installer supports automating installs via preconfiguration files. A preconfiguration file can be loaded from the network or from removable media, and used to fill in answers to questions asked during the installation process." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: install-methods.xml:1623 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Full documentation on preseeding including a working example that you can edit is in <xref linkend=\"appendix-preseed\"/>." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/po/da/installation-howto.po b/po/da/installation-howto.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b8f358e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/po/da/installation-howto.po @@ -0,0 +1,315 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: d-i-manual_installation-howto\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: debian-boot@lists.debian.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2012-10-24 19:53+0000\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: application/x-xml2pot; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. Tag: title +#: installation-howto.xml:5 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installation Howto" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:7 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This document describes how to install &debian-gnu; &releasename; for the &arch-title; (<quote>&architecture;</quote>) with the new &d-i;. It is a quick walkthrough of the installation process which should contain all the information you will need for most installs. When more information can be useful, we will link to more detailed explanations in other parts of this document." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: installation-howto.xml:19 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Preliminaries" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:20 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<phrase condition=\"unofficial-build\"> The debian-installer is still in a beta state. </phrase> If you encounter bugs during your install, please refer to <xref linkend=\"submit-bug\"/> for instructions on how to report them. If you have questions which cannot be answered by this document, please direct them to the debian-boot mailing list (&email-debian-boot-list;) or ask on IRC (#debian-boot on the OFTC network)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: installation-howto.xml:36 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Booting the installer" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:37 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<phrase condition=\"unofficial-build\"> For some quick links to CD images, check out the <ulink url=\"&url-d-i;\"> &d-i; home page</ulink>. </phrase> The debian-cd team provides builds of CD images using &d-i; on the <ulink url=\"&url-debian-cd;\">Debian CD page</ulink>. For more information on where to get CDs, see <xref linkend=\"official-cdrom\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:47 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Some installation methods require other images than CD images. <phrase condition=\"unofficial-build\"> The <ulink url=\"&url-d-i;\">&d-i; home page</ulink> has links to other images. </phrase> <xref linkend=\"where-files\"/> explains how to find images on &debian; mirrors." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:57 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The subsections below will give the details about which images you should get for each possible means of installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: installation-howto.xml:65 +#, no-c-format +msgid "CDROM" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:67 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The netinst CD image is a popular image which can be used to install &releasename; with the &d-i;. This image is intended to boot from CD and install additional packages over a network; hence the name 'netinst'. The image has the software components needed to run the installer and the base packages to provide a minimal &releasename; system. If you'd rather, you can get a full size CD image which will not need the network to install. You only need the first CD of the set." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:77 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Download whichever type you prefer and burn it to a CD. <phrase arch=\"any-x86\">To boot the CD, you may need to change your BIOS configuration, as explained in <xref linkend=\"bios-setup\"/>.</phrase> <phrase arch=\"powerpc\"> To boot a PowerMac from CD, press the <keycap>c</keycap> key while booting. See <xref linkend=\"boot-cd\"/> for other ways to boot from CD. </phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: installation-howto.xml:91 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Floppy" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:92 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you can't boot from CD, you can download floppy images to install &debian;. You need the <filename>floppy/boot.img</filename>, the <filename>floppy/root.img</filename> and one or more of the driver disks." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:98 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The boot floppy is the one with <filename>boot.img</filename> on it. This floppy, when booted, will prompt you to insert a second floppy — use the one with <filename>root.img</filename> on it." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:104 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you're planning to install over the network, you will usually need the <filename>floppy/net-drivers-1.img</filename>. For PCMCIA or USB networking, and some less common network cards, you will also need a second driver floppy, <filename>floppy/net-drivers-2.img</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:111 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you have a CD, but cannot boot from it, then boot from floppies and use <filename>floppy/cd-drivers.img</filename> on a driver disk to complete the install using the CD." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:117 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Floppy disks are one of the least reliable media around, so be prepared for lots of bad disks (see <xref linkend=\"unreliable-floppies\"/>). Each <filename>.img</filename> file you downloaded goes on a single floppy; you can use the dd command to write it to /dev/fd0 or some other means (see <xref linkend=\"create-floppy\"/> for details). Since you'll have more than one floppy, it's a good idea to label them." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: installation-howto.xml:130 +#, no-c-format +msgid "USB memory stick" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:131 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It's also possible to install from removable USB storage devices. For example a USB keychain can make a handy &debian; install medium that you can take with you anywhere." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:137 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The easiest way to prepare your USB memory stick is to download any Debian CD or DVD image that will fit on it, and write the CD image directly to the memory stick. Of course this will destroy anything already on the memory stick. This works because Debian CD images are \"isohybrid\" images that can boot both from CD and from USB drives." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:145 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The easiest way to prepare your USB memory stick is to download <filename>hd-media/boot.img.gz</filename>, and use gunzip to extract the 1 GB image from that file. Write this image directly to your memory stick, which must be at least 1 GB in size. Of course this will destroy anything already on the memory stick. Then mount the memory stick, which will now have a FAT filesystem on it. Next, download a &debian; netinst CD image, and copy that file to the memory stick; any filename is ok as long as it ends in <literal>.iso</literal>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:156 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There are other, more flexible ways to set up a memory stick to use the debian-installer, and it's possible to get it to work with smaller memory sticks. For details, see <xref linkend=\"boot-usb-files\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:162 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Some BIOSes can boot USB storage directly, and some cannot. You may need to configure your BIOS to boot from a <quote>removable drive</quote> or even a <quote>USB-ZIP</quote> to get it to boot from the USB device. For helpful hints and details, see <xref linkend=\"usb-boot\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:169 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Booting Macintosh systems from USB storage devices involves manual use of Open Firmware. For directions, see <xref linkend=\"usb-boot\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: installation-howto.xml:178 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Booting from network" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:179 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It's also possible to boot &d-i; completely from the net. The various methods to netboot depend on your architecture and netboot setup. The files in <filename>netboot/</filename> can be used to netboot &d-i;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:185 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The easiest thing to set up is probably PXE netbooting. Untar the file <filename>netboot/pxeboot.tar.gz</filename> into <filename>/srv/tftp</filename> or wherever is appropriate for your tftp server. Set up your DHCP server to pass filename <filename>pxelinux.0</filename> to clients, and with luck everything will just work. For detailed instructions, see <xref linkend=\"install-tftp\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: installation-howto.xml:199 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Booting from hard disk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:200 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It's possible to boot the installer using no removable media, but just an existing hard disk, which can have a different OS on it. Download <filename>hd-media/initrd.gz</filename>, <filename>hd-media/vmlinuz</filename>, and a &debian; CD image to the top-level directory of the hard disk. Make sure that the CD image has a filename ending in <literal>.iso</literal>. Now it's just a matter of booting linux with the initrd. <phrase arch=\"x86\"> <xref linkend=\"boot-initrd\"/> explains one way to do it. </phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: installation-howto.xml:217 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:218 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Once the installer starts, you will be greeted with an initial screen. Press &enterkey; to boot, or read the instructions for other boot methods and parameters (see <xref linkend=\"boot-parms\"/>)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:224 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After a while you will be asked to select your language. Use the arrow keys to pick a language and press &enterkey; to continue. Next you'll be asked to select your country, with the choices including countries where your language is spoken. If it's not on the short list, a list of all the countries in the world is available." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:232 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You may be asked to confirm your keyboard layout. Choose the default unless you know better." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:237 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Now sit back while debian-installer detects some of your hardware, and loads the rest of itself from CD, floppy, USB, etc." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:242 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Next the installer will try to detect your network hardware and set up networking by DHCP. If you are not on a network or do not have DHCP, you will be given the opportunity to configure the network manually." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:248 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The next step is setting up your clock and time zone. The installer will try to contact a time server on the Internet to ensure the clock is set correctly. The time zone is based on the country selected earlier and the installer will only ask to select one if a country has multiple zones." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:255 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Now it is time to partition your disks. First you will be given the opportunity to automatically partition either an entire drive, or available free space on a drive (see <xref linkend=\"partman-auto\"/>). This is recommended for new users or anyone in a hurry. If you do not want to autopartition, choose <guimenuitem>Manual</guimenuitem> from the menu." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:263 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you have an existing DOS or Windows partition that you want to preserve, be very careful with automatic partitioning. If you choose manual partitioning, you can use the installer to resize existing FAT or NTFS partitions to create room for the &debian; install: simply select the partition and specify its new size." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:270 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On the next screen you will see your partition table, how the partitions will be formatted, and where they will be mounted. Select a partition to modify or delete it. If you did automatic partitioning, you should just be able to choose <guimenuitem>Finish partitioning and write changes to disk</guimenuitem> from the menu to use what it set up. Remember to assign at least one partition for swap space and to mount a partition on <filename>/</filename>. For more detailed information on how to use the partitioner, please refer to <xref linkend=\"di-partition\"/>; the appendix <xref linkend=\"partitioning\"/> has more general information about partitioning." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:283 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Now &d-i; formats your partitions and starts to install the base system, which can take a while. That is followed by installing a kernel." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:288 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The base system that was installed earlier is a working, but very minimal installation. To make the system more functional the next step allows you to install additional packages by selecting tasks. Before packages can be installed <classname>apt</classname> needs to be configured as that defines from where the packages will be retrieved. The <quote>Standard system</quote> task will be selected by default and should normally be installed. Select the <quote>Desktop environment</quote> task if you would like to have a graphical desktop after the installation. See <xref linkend=\"pkgsel\"/> for additional information about this step." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:300 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installation of the base system is followed by setting up user accounts. By default you will need to provide a password for the <quote>root</quote> (administrator) account and information necessary to create one regular user account." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:307 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The last step is to install a boot loader. If the installer detects other operating systems on your computer, it will add them to the boot menu and let you know. <phrase arch=\"any-x86\">By default GRUB will be installed to the master boot record of the first harddrive, which is generally a good choice. You'll be given the opportunity to override that choice and install it elsewhere. </phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:317 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&d-i; will now tell you that the installation has finished. Remove the cdrom or other boot media and hit &enterkey; to reboot your machine. It should boot up into the newly installed system and allow you to log in. This is explained in <xref linkend=\"boot-new\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:324 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you need more information on the install process, see <xref linkend=\"d-i-intro\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: installation-howto.xml:333 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Send us an installation report" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:334 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you successfully managed an installation with &d-i;, please take time to provide us with a report. The simplest way to do so is to install the reportbug package (<command>aptitude install reportbug</command>), configure <classname>reportbug</classname> as explained in <xref linkend=\"mail-outgoing\"/>, and run <command>reportbug installation-reports</command>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:344 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you did not complete the install, you probably found a bug in debian-installer. To improve the installer it is necessary that we know about them, so please take the time to report them. You can use an installation report to report problems; if the install completely fails, see <xref linkend=\"problem-report\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: installation-howto.xml:356 +#, no-c-format +msgid "And finally…" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: installation-howto.xml:357 +#, no-c-format +msgid "We hope that your &debian; installation is pleasant and that you find &debian; useful. You might want to read <xref linkend=\"post-install\"/>." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/po/da/partitioning.po b/po/da/partitioning.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5cab7d795 --- /dev/null +++ b/po/da/partitioning.po @@ -0,0 +1,810 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: d-i-manual_partitioning\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: debian-boot@lists.debian.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2012-10-24 19:53+0000\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: application/x-xml2pot; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. Tag: title +#: partitioning.xml:5 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Partitioning for &debian;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: partitioning.xml:13 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Deciding on &debian; Partitions and Sizes" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:14 +#, no-c-format +msgid "At a bare minimum, GNU/&arch-kernel; needs one partition for itself. You can have a single partition containing the entire operating system, applications, and your personal files. Most people feel that a separate swap partition is also a necessity, although it's not strictly true. <quote>Swap</quote> is scratch space for an operating system, which allows the system to use disk storage as <quote>virtual memory</quote>. By putting swap on a separate partition, &arch-kernel; can make much more efficient use of it. It is possible to force &arch-kernel; to use a regular file as swap, but it is not recommended." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:26 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Most people choose to give GNU/&arch-kernel; more than the minimum number of partitions, however. There are two reasons you might want to break up the file system into a number of smaller partitions. The first is for safety. If something happens to corrupt the file system, generally only one partition is affected. Thus, you only have to replace (from the backups you've been carefully keeping) a portion of your system. At a bare minimum, you should consider creating what is commonly called a <quote>root partition</quote>. This contains the most essential components of the system. If any other partitions get corrupted, you can still boot into GNU/&arch-kernel; to fix the system. This can save you the trouble of having to reinstall the system from scratch." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:40 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The second reason is generally more important in a business setting, but it really depends on your use of the machine. For example, a mail server getting spammed with e-mail can easily fill a partition. If you made <filename>/var/mail</filename> a separate partition on the mail server, most of the system will remain working even if you get spammed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:48 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The only real drawback to using more partitions is that it is often difficult to know in advance what your needs will be. If you make a partition too small then you will either have to reinstall the system or you will be constantly moving things around to make room in the undersized partition. On the other hand, if you make the partition too big, you will be wasting space that could be used elsewhere. Disk space is cheap nowadays, but why throw your money away?" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: partitioning.xml:67 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The Directory Tree" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:68 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&debian-gnu; adheres to the <ulink url=\"&url-fhs-home;\">Filesystem Hierarchy Standard</ulink> for directory and file naming. This standard allows users and software programs to predict the location of files and directories. The root level directory is represented simply by the slash <filename>/</filename>. At the root level, all &debian; systems include these directories:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:82 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:82 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Content" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:88 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>bin</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:89 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Essential command binaries" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:91 +#, no-c-format +msgid "boot" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:92 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Static files of the boot loader" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:94 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>dev</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:95 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Device files" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:97 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>etc</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:98 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Host-specific system configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:100 +#, no-c-format +msgid "home" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:101 +#, no-c-format +msgid "User home directories" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:103 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>lib</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:104 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Essential shared libraries and kernel modules" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:106 +#, no-c-format +msgid "media" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:107 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Contains mount points for replaceable media" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:109 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>mnt</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:110 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Mount point for mounting a file system temporarily" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:112 +#, no-c-format +msgid "proc" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:113 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Virtual directory for system information (2.4 and 2.6 kernels)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:115 +#, no-c-format +msgid "root" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:116 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Home directory for the root user" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:118 +#, no-c-format +msgid "sbin" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:119 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Essential system binaries" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:121 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>sys</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:122 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Virtual directory for system information (2.6 kernels)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:124 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>tmp</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:125 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Temporary files" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:127 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>usr</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:128 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Secondary hierarchy" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:130 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>var</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:131 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Variable data" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:133 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>srv</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:134 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Data for services provided by the system" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: partitioning.xml:136 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>opt</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: partitioning.xml:137 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Add-on application software packages" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:142 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The following is a list of important considerations regarding directories and partitions. Note that disk usage varies widely given system configuration and specific usage patterns. The recommendations here are general guidelines and provide a starting point for partitioning." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:152 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The root partition <filename>/</filename> must always physically contain <filename>/etc</filename>, <filename>/bin</filename>, <filename>/sbin</filename>, <filename>/lib</filename> and <filename>/dev</filename>, otherwise you won't be able to boot. Typically 150–250MB is needed for the root partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:161 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>/usr</filename>: contains all user programs (<filename>/usr/bin</filename>), libraries (<filename>/usr/lib</filename>), documentation (<filename>/usr/share/doc</filename>), etc. This is the part of the file system that generally takes up most space. You should provide at least 500MB of disk space. This amount should be increased depending on the number and type of packages you plan to install. A generous workstation or server installation should allow 4–6GB." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:174 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>/var</filename>: variable data like news articles, e-mails, web sites, databases, the packaging system cache, etc. will be placed under this directory. The size of this directory depends greatly on the usage of your system, but for most people will be dictated by the package management tool's overhead. If you are going to do a full installation of just about everything &debian; has to offer, all in one session, setting aside 2 or 3 GB of space for <filename>/var</filename> should be sufficient. If you are going to install in pieces (that is to say, install services and utilities, followed by text stuff, then X, ...), you can get away with 300–500 MB. If hard drive space is at a premium and you don't plan on doing major system updates, you can get by with as little as 30 or 40 MB." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:190 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>/tmp</filename>: temporary data created by programs will most likely go in this directory. 40–100MB should usually be enough. Some applications — including archive manipulators, CD/DVD authoring tools, and multimedia software — may use <filename>/tmp</filename> to temporarily store image files. If you plan to use such applications, you should adjust the space available in <filename>/tmp</filename> accordingly." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:201 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>/home</filename>: every user will put his personal data into a subdirectory of this directory. Its size depends on how many users will be using the system and what files are to be stored in their directories. Depending on your planned usage you should reserve about 100MB for each user, but adapt this value to your needs. Reserve a lot more space if you plan to save a lot of multimedia files (pictures, MP3, movies) in your home directory." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: partitioning.xml:222 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Recommended Partitioning Scheme" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:223 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For new users, personal &debian; boxes, home systems, and other single-user setups, a single <filename>/</filename> partition (plus swap) is probably the easiest, simplest way to go. However, if your partition is larger than around 6GB, choose ext3 as your partition type. Ext2 partitions need periodic file system integrity checking, and this can cause delays during booting when the partition is large." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:232 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For multi-user systems or systems with lots of disk space, it's best to put <filename>/usr</filename>, <filename>/var</filename>, <filename>/tmp</filename>, and <filename>/home</filename> each on their own partitions separate from the <filename>/</filename> partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:240 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You might need a separate <filename>/usr/local</filename> partition if you plan to install many programs that are not part of the &debian; distribution. If your machine will be a mail server, you might need to make <filename>/var/mail</filename> a separate partition. Often, putting <filename>/tmp</filename> on its own partition, for instance 20–50MB, is a good idea. If you are setting up a server with lots of user accounts, it's generally good to have a separate, large <filename>/home</filename> partition. In general, the partitioning situation varies from computer to computer depending on its uses." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:252 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For very complex systems, you should see the <ulink url=\"&url-multidisk-howto;\"> Multi Disk HOWTO</ulink>. This contains in-depth information, mostly of interest to ISPs and people setting up servers." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:259 +#, no-c-format +msgid "With respect to the issue of swap partition size, there are many views. One rule of thumb which works well is to use as much swap as you have system memory. It also shouldn't be smaller than 16MB, in most cases. Of course, there are exceptions to these rules. If you are trying to solve 10000 simultaneous equations on a machine with 256MB of memory, you may need a gigabyte (or more) of swap." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:268 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On some 32-bit architectures (m68k and PowerPC), the maximum size of a swap partition is 2GB. That should be enough for nearly any installation. However, if your swap requirements are this high, you should probably try to spread the swap across different disks (also called <quote>spindles</quote>) and, if possible, different SCSI or IDE channels. The kernel will balance swap usage between multiple swap partitions, giving better performance." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:278 +#, no-c-format +msgid "As an example, an older home machine might have 32MB of RAM and a 1.7GB IDE drive on <filename>/dev/hda</filename>. There might be a 500MB partition for another operating system on <filename>/dev/hda1</filename>, a 32MB swap partition on <filename>/dev/hda3</filename> and about 1.2GB on <filename>/dev/hda2</filename> as the Linux partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:287 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For an idea of the space taken by tasks you might be interested in adding after your system installation is complete, check <xref linkend=\"tasksel-size-list\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: partitioning.xml:303 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Device Names in Linux" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:304 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Linux disks and partition names may be different from other operating systems. You need to know the names that Linux uses when you create and mount partitions. Here's the basic naming scheme:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:312 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The first floppy drive is named <filename>/dev/fd0</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:317 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The second floppy drive is named <filename>/dev/fd1</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:322 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The first SCSI disk (SCSI ID address-wise) is named <filename>/dev/sda</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:328 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The second SCSI disk (address-wise) is named <filename>/dev/sdb</filename>, and so on." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:334 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The first SCSI CD-ROM is named <filename>/dev/scd0</filename>, also known as <filename>/dev/sr0</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:340 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The master disk on IDE primary controller is named <filename>/dev/hda</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:346 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The slave disk on IDE primary controller is named <filename>/dev/hdb</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:352 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The master and slave disks of the secondary controller can be called <filename>/dev/hdc</filename> and <filename>/dev/hdd</filename>, respectively. Newer IDE controllers can actually have two channels, effectively acting like two controllers." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:363 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The first DASD device is named <filename>/dev/dasda</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:369 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The second DASD device is named <filename>/dev/dasdb</filename>, and so on." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:377 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The partitions on each disk are represented by appending a decimal number to the disk name: <filename>sda1</filename> and <filename>sda2</filename> represent the first and second partitions of the first SCSI disk drive in your system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:384 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Here is a real-life example. Let's assume you have a system with 2 SCSI disks, one at SCSI address 2 and the other at SCSI address 4. The first disk (at address 2) is then named <filename>sda</filename>, and the second <filename>sdb</filename>. If the <filename>sda</filename> drive has 3 partitions on it, these will be named <filename>sda1</filename>, <filename>sda2</filename>, and <filename>sda3</filename>. The same applies to the <filename>sdb</filename> disk and its partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:395 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that if you have two SCSI host bus adapters (i.e., controllers), the order of the drives can get confusing. The best solution in this case is to watch the boot messages, assuming you know the drive models and/or capacities." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:402 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Linux represents the primary partitions as the drive name, plus the numbers 1 through 4. For example, the first primary partition on the first IDE drive is <filename>/dev/hda1</filename>. The logical partitions are numbered starting at 5, so the first logical partition on that same drive is <filename>/dev/hda5</filename>. Remember that the extended partition, that is, the primary partition holding the logical partitions, is not usable by itself. This applies to SCSI disks as well as IDE disks." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:413 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Sun disk partitions allow for 8 separate partitions (or slices). The third partition is usually (and is preferred to have) the <quote>Whole Disk</quote> partition. This partition references all of the sectors of the disk, and is used by the boot loader (either SILO, or Sun's)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:420 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The partitions on each disk are represented by appending a decimal number to the disk name: <filename>dasda1</filename> and <filename>dasda2</filename> represent the first and second partitions of the first DASD device in your system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: partitioning.xml:435 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&debian; Partitioning Programs" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:436 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Several varieties of partitioning programs have been adapted by &debian; developers to work on various types of hard disks and computer architectures. Following is a list of the program(s) applicable for your architecture." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: command +#: partitioning.xml:448 +#, no-c-format +msgid "partman" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:449 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Recommended partitioning tool in &debian;. This Swiss army knife can also resize partitions, create filesystems <phrase arch=\"any-x86\"> (<quote>format</quote> in Windows speak)</phrase> and assign them to the mountpoints." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: command +#: partitioning.xml:460 +#, no-c-format +msgid "fdisk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:461 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The original Linux disk partitioner, good for gurus." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:465 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Be careful if you have existing FreeBSD partitions on your machine. The installation kernels include support for these partitions, but the way that <command>fdisk</command> represents them (or not) can make the device names differ. See the <ulink url=\"&url-linux-freebsd;\">Linux+FreeBSD HOWTO</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: command +#: partitioning.xml:477 +#, no-c-format +msgid "cfdisk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:478 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A simple-to-use, full-screen disk partitioner for the rest of us." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:482 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that <command>cfdisk</command> doesn't understand FreeBSD partitions at all, and, again, device names may differ as a result." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: command +#: partitioning.xml:491 +#, no-c-format +msgid "atari-fdisk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:492 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Atari-aware version of <command>fdisk</command>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: command +#: partitioning.xml:500 +#, no-c-format +msgid "amiga-fdisk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:501 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Amiga-aware version of <command>fdisk</command>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: command +#: partitioning.xml:509 +#, no-c-format +msgid "mac-fdisk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:510 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Mac-aware version of <command>fdisk</command>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: command +#: partitioning.xml:518 +#, no-c-format +msgid "pmac-fdisk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:519 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PowerMac-aware version of <command>fdisk</command>, also used by BVM and Motorola VMEbus systems." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: command +#: partitioning.xml:528 +#, no-c-format +msgid "fdasd" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:529 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&arch-title; version of <command>fdisk</command>; Please read the fdasd manual page or chapter 13 in <ulink url=\"http://oss.software.ibm.com/developerworks/opensource/linux390/docu/l390dd08.pdf\"> Device Drivers and Installation Commands</ulink> for details." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:540 +#, no-c-format +msgid "One of these programs will be run by default when you select <guimenuitem>Partition disks</guimenuitem> (or similar). It may be possible to use a different partitioning tool from the command line on VT2, but this is not recommended." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:547 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Remember to mark your boot partition as <quote>Bootable</quote>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:550 +#, no-c-format +msgid "One key point when partitioning for Mac type disks is that the swap partition is identified by its name; it must be named <quote>swap</quote>. All Mac linux partitions are the same partition type, Apple_UNIX_SRV2. Please read the fine manual. We also suggest reading the <ulink url=\"&url-mac-fdisk-tutorial;\">mac-fdisk Tutorial</ulink>, which includes steps you should take if you are sharing your disk with MacOS." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: partitioning.xml:566 partitioning.xml:590 partitioning.xml:686 partitioning.xml:800 partitioning.xml:877 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Partitioning for &arch-title;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:567 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PALO, the HPPA boot loader, requires a partition of type <quote>F0</quote> somewhere in the first 2GB. This is where the boot loader and an optional kernel and RAMdisk will be stored, so make it big enough for that — at least 4Mb (I like 8–16MB). An additional requirement of the firmware is that the Linux kernel must reside within the first 2GB of the disk. This is typically achieved by making the root ext2 partition fit entirely within the first 2GB of the disk. Alternatively you can create a small ext2 partition near the start of the disk and mount that on <filename>/boot</filename>, since that is the directory where the Linux kernel(s) will be stored. <filename>/boot</filename> needs to be big enough to hold whatever kernels (and backups) you might wish to load; 25–50MB is generally sufficient." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:591 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you have an existing other operating system such as DOS or Windows and you want to preserve that operating system while installing &debian;, you may need to resize its partition to free up space for the &debian; installation. The installer supports resizing of both FAT and NTFS filesystems; when you get to the installer's partitioning step, select the option <guimenuitem>Manual</guimenuitem> and then simply select an existing partition and change its size." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:601 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The PC BIOS generally adds additional constraints for disk partitioning. There is a limit to how many <quote>primary</quote> and <quote>logical</quote> partitions a drive can contain. Additionally, with pre 1994–98 BIOSes, there are limits to where on the drive the BIOS can boot from. More information can be found in the <ulink url=\"&url-partition-howto;\">Linux Partition HOWTO</ulink>, but this section will include a brief overview to help you plan most situations." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:611 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<quote>Primary</quote> partitions are the original partitioning scheme for PC disks. However, there can only be four of them. To get past this limitation, <quote>extended</quote> and <quote>logical</quote> partitions were invented. By setting one of your primary partitions as an extended partition, you can subdivide all the space allocated to that partition into logical partitions. You can create up to 60 logical partitions per extended partition; however, you can only have one extended partition per drive." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:622 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Linux limits the partitions per drive to 255 partitions for SCSI disks (3 usable primary partitions, 252 logical partitions), and 63 partitions on an IDE drive (3 usable primary partitions, 60 logical partitions). However the normal &debian-gnu; system provides only 20 devices for partitions, so you may not install on partitions higher than 20 unless you first manually create devices for those partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:632 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you have a large IDE disk, and are using neither LBA addressing, nor overlay drivers (sometimes provided by hard disk manufacturers), then the boot partition (the partition containing your kernel image) must be placed within the first 1024 cylinders of your hard drive (usually around 524 megabytes, without BIOS translation)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:640 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This restriction doesn't apply if you have a BIOS newer than around 1995–98 (depending on the manufacturer) that supports the <quote>Enhanced Disk Drive Support Specification</quote>. Both Lilo, the Linux loader, and &debian;'s alternative <command>mbr</command> must use the BIOS to read the kernel from the disk into RAM. If the BIOS int 0x13 large disk access extensions are found to be present, they will be utilized. Otherwise, the legacy disk access interface is used as a fall-back, and it cannot be used to address any location on the disk higher than the 1023rd cylinder. Once &arch-kernel; is booted, no matter what BIOS your computer has, these restrictions no longer apply, since &arch-kernel; does not use the BIOS for disk access." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:654 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you have a large disk, you might have to use cylinder translation techniques, which you can set from your BIOS setup program, such as LBA (Logical Block Addressing) or CHS translation mode (<quote>Large</quote>). More information about issues with large disks can be found in the <ulink url=\"&url-large-disk-howto;\">Large Disk HOWTO</ulink>. If you are using a cylinder translation scheme, and the BIOS does not support the large disk access extensions, then your boot partition has to fit within the <emphasis>translated</emphasis> representation of the 1024th cylinder." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:666 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The recommended way of accomplishing this is to create a small (25–50MB should suffice) partition at the beginning of the disk to be used as the boot partition, and then create whatever other partitions you wish to have, in the remaining area. This boot partition <emphasis>must</emphasis> be mounted on <filename>/boot</filename>, since that is the directory where the &arch-kernel; kernel(s) will be stored. This configuration will work on any system, regardless of whether LBA or large disk CHS translation is used, and regardless of whether your BIOS supports the large disk access extensions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:687 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The <command>partman</command> disk partitioner is the default partitioning tool for the installer. It manages the set of partitions and their mount points to ensure that the disks and filesystems are properly configured for a successful installation. It actually uses <command>parted</command> to do the on-disk partitioning." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: partitioning.xml:699 +#, no-c-format +msgid "EFI Recognized Formats" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:700 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The IA-64 EFI firmware supports two partition table (or disk label) formats, GPT and MS-DOS. MS-DOS, the format typically used on i386 PCs, is no longer recommended for IA-64 systems. Although the installer also provides <command>cfdisk</command>, you should only use <ulink url=\"parted.txt\"> <command>parted</command></ulink> because only it can manage both GPT and MS-DOS tables correctly." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:712 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The automatic partitioning recipes for <command>partman</command> allocate an EFI partition as the first partition on the disk. You can also set up the partition under the <guimenuitem>Guided partitioning</guimenuitem> from the main menu in a manner similar to setting up a <emphasis>swap</emphasis> partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:720 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "The <command>partman</command> partitioner will handle most disk layouts. For those rare cases where it is necessary to manually set up a disk, you can use the shell as described above and run the <command>parted</command> utility directly using its command line interface. Assuming that you want to erase your whole disk and create a GPT table and some partitions, then something similar to the following command sequence could be used: <informalexample><screen>\n" + " mklabel gpt\n" + " mkpartfs primary fat 0 50\n" + " mkpartfs primary linux-swap 51 1000\n" + " mkpartfs primary ext2 1001 3000\n" + " set 1 boot on\n" + " print\n" + " quit\n" + "</screen></informalexample> This creates a new partition table, and three partitions to be used as an EFI boot partition, swap space, and a root file system. Finally it sets the boot flag on the EFI partition. Partitions are specified in Megabytes, with start and end offsets from the beginning of the disk. So, for example, above we created a 1999MB ext2 file system starting at offset 1001MB from the start of the disk. Note that formatting swap space with <command>parted</command> can take a few minutes to complete, as it scans the partition for bad blocks." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: partitioning.xml:745 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Boot Loader Partition Requirements" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:746 +#, no-c-format +msgid "ELILO, the IA-64 boot loader, requires a partition containing a FAT file system with the <userinput>boot</userinput> flag set. The partition must be big enough to hold the boot loader and any kernels or RAMdisks you may wish to boot. A minimum size would be about 20MB, but if you expect to run with multiple kernels, then 128MB might be a better size." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:755 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The EFI Boot Manager and the EFI Shell fully support the GPT table so the boot partition does not necessarily have to be the first partition or even on the same disk. This is convenient if you should forget to allocate the partition and only find out after you have formatted the other partitions on your disk(s). The <command>partman</command> partitioner checks for an EFI partition at the same time it checks for a properly set up <emphasis>root</emphasis> partition. This gives you an opportunity to correct the disk layout before the package install begins. The easiest way to correct this omission is to shrink the last partition of the disk to make enough free space for adding an EFI partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:770 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is strongly recommended that you allocate the EFI boot partition on the same disk as the <emphasis>root</emphasis> filesystem." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: partitioning.xml:778 +#, no-c-format +msgid "EFI Diagnostic Partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:779 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The EFI firmware is significantly more sophisticated than the usual BIOS seen on most x86 PCs. Some system vendors take advantage of the ability of the EFI to access files and run programs from a hard disk filesystem to store diagnostics and EFI based system management utilities on the hard disk. This is a separate FAT format filesystem on the system disk. Consult the system documentation and accessories that come with the system for details. The easiest time to set up a diagnostics partition is at the same time you set up the EFI boot partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:801 +#, no-c-format +msgid "SGI machines require an SGI disk label in order to make the system bootable from hard disk. It can be created in the fdisk expert menu. The thereby created volume header (partition number 9) should be at least 3MB large. If the volume header created is too small, you can simply delete partition number 9 and re-add it with a different size. Note that the volume header must start at sector 0." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: partitioning.xml:818 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Partitioning Newer PowerMacs" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:819 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are installing onto a NewWorld PowerMac you must create a special bootstrap partition to hold the boot loader. The size of this partition must have at least 819200 bytes and its partition type must be <emphasis>Apple_Bootstrap</emphasis>. If the bootstrap partition is not created with the <emphasis>Apple_Bootstrap</emphasis> type your machine cannot be made bootable from the hard disk. This partition can easily be created by creating a new partition in <command>partman</command> and telling it to use it as a <quote>NewWorld boot partition</quote>, or in <command>mac-fdisk</command> using the <userinput>b</userinput> command." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:832 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The special partition type Apple_Bootstrap is required to prevent MacOS from mounting and damaging the bootstrap partition, as there are special modifications made to it in order for OpenFirmware to boot it automatically." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:839 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that the bootstrap partition is only meant to hold 3 very small files: the <command>yaboot</command> binary, its configuration <filename>yaboot.conf</filename>, and a first stage OpenFirmware loader <command>ofboot.b</command>. It need not and must not be mounted on your file system nor have kernels or anything else copied to it. The <command>ybin</command> and <command>mkofboot</command> utilities are used to manipulate this partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:849 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In order for OpenFirmware to automatically boot &debian-gnu; the bootstrap partition should appear before other boot partitions on the disk, especially MacOS boot partitions. The bootstrap partition should be the first one you create. However, if you add a bootstrap partition later, you can use <command>mac-fdisk</command>'s <userinput>r</userinput> command to reorder the partition map so the bootstrap partition comes right after the map (which is always partition 1). It's the logical map order, not the physical address order, that counts." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:861 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Apple disks normally have several small driver partitions. If you intend to dual boot your machine with MacOSX, you should retain these partitions and a small HFS partition (800k is the minimum size). That is because MacOSX, on every boot, offers to initialize any disks which do not have active MacOS partitions and driver partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:878 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Make sure you create a <quote>Sun disk label</quote> on your boot disk. This is the only kind of partition scheme that the OpenBoot PROM understands, and so it's the only scheme from which you can boot. The <keycap>s</keycap> key is used in <command>fdisk</command> to create Sun disk labels." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:886 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Furthermore, on &arch-title; disks, make sure your first partition on your boot disk starts at cylinder 0. While this is required, it also means that the first partition will contain the partition table and the boot block, which are the first two sectors of the disk. You must <emphasis>not</emphasis> put swap on the first partition of the boot drive, since swap partitions do not preserve the first few sectors of the partition. You can put Ext2 or UFS partitions there; these will leave the partition table and the boot block alone." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: partitioning.xml:897 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is also advised that the third partition should be of type <quote>Whole disk</quote> (type 5), and contain the entire disk (from the first cylinder to the last). This is simply a convention of Sun disk labels, and helps the <command>SILO</command> boot loader keep its bearings." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/po/da/post-install.po b/po/da/post-install.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8367ac28c --- /dev/null +++ b/po/da/post-install.po @@ -0,0 +1,543 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: d-i-manual_post-install\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: debian-boot@lists.debian.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2012-10-24 19:53+0000\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: application/x-xml2pot; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:5 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Next Steps and Where to Go From Here" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:13 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Shutting down the system" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:15 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To shut down a running &debian-gnu; system, you must not reboot with the reset switch on the front or back of your computer, or just turn off the computer. &debian-gnu; should be shut down in a controlled manner, otherwise files might get lost and/or disk damage might occur. If you run a desktop environment, there is usually an option to <quote>log out</quote> available from the application menu that allows you to shutdown (or reboot) the system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:25 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Alternatively you can press the key combination <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Del</keycap> </keycombo> <phrase arch=\"powerpc\"> or <keycombo> <keycap>Control</keycap> <keycap>Shift</keycap> <keycap>Power</keycap> </keycombo> on Macintosh systems</phrase>. A last option is to log in as root and type one of the commands <command>poweroff</command>, <command>halt</command> or <command>shutdown -h now</command> if either of the key combinations do not work or you prefer to type commands; use <command>reboot</command> to reboot the system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:46 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If You Are New to Unix" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:47 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are new to Unix, you probably should go out and buy some books and do some reading. A lot of valuable information can also be found in the <ulink url=\"&url-debian-reference;\">Debian Reference</ulink>. This <ulink url=\"&url-unix-faq;\">list of Unix FAQs</ulink> contains a number of UseNet documents which provide a nice historical reference." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:55 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Linux is an implementation of Unix. The <ulink url=\"&url-ldp;\">Linux Documentation Project (LDP)</ulink> collects a number of HOWTOs and online books relating to Linux. Most of these documents can be installed locally; just install the <classname>doc-linux-html</classname> package (HTML versions) or the <classname>doc-linux-text</classname> package (ASCII versions), then look in <filename>/usr/share/doc/HOWTO</filename>. International versions of the LDP HOWTOs are also available as &debian; packages." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:76 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Orienting Yourself to &debian;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:77 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&debian; is a little different from other distributions. Even if you're familiar with Linux in other distributions, there are things you should know about &debian; to help you to keep your system in a good, clean state. This chapter contains material to help you get oriented; it is not intended to be a tutorial for how to use &debian;, but just a very brief glimpse of the system for the very rushed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:88 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&debian; Packaging System" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:89 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The most important concept to grasp is the &debian; packaging system. In essence, large parts of your system should be considered under the control of the packaging system. These include: <itemizedlist> <listitem><para> <filename>/usr</filename> (excluding <filename>/usr/local</filename>) </para></listitem> <listitem><para> <filename>/var</filename> (you could make <filename>/var/local</filename> and be safe in there) </para></listitem> <listitem><para> <filename>/bin</filename> </para></listitem> <listitem><para> <filename>/sbin</filename> </para></listitem> <listitem><para> <filename>/lib</filename> </para></listitem> </itemizedlist> For instance, if you replace <filename>/usr/bin/perl</filename>, that will work, but then if you upgrade your <classname>perl</classname> package, the file you put there will be replaced. Experts can get around this by putting packages on <quote>hold</quote> in <command>aptitude</command>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:130 +#, no-c-format +msgid "One of the best installation methods is apt. You can use the command line version <command>apt-get</command> or full-screen text version <application>aptitude</application>. Note apt will also let you merge main, contrib, and non-free so you can have export-restricted packages as well as standard versions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:141 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Additional Software Available for &debian;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:142 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There are official and unofficial software repositories that are not enabled in the default &debian; install. These contain software which many find important and expect to have. Information on these additional repositories can be found on the &debian; Wiki page titled <ulink url=\"&url-debian-wiki-software;\">The Software Available for &debian;'s Stable Release</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:154 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Application Version Management" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:155 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Alternative versions of applications are managed by update-alternatives. If you are maintaining multiple versions of your applications, read the update-alternatives man page." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:165 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Cron Job Management" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:166 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Any jobs under the purview of the system administrator should be in <filename>/etc</filename>, since they are configuration files. If you have a root cron job for daily, weekly, or monthly runs, put them in <filename>/etc/cron.{daily,weekly,monthly}</filename>. These are invoked from <filename>/etc/crontab</filename>, and will run in alphabetic order, which serializes them." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:175 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On the other hand, if you have a cron job that (a) needs to run as a special user, or (b) needs to run at a special time or frequency, you can use either <filename>/etc/crontab</filename>, or, better yet, <filename>/etc/cron.d/whatever</filename>. These particular files also have an extra field that allows you to stipulate the user account under which the cron job runs." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:184 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In either case, you just edit the files and cron will notice them automatically. There is no need to run a special command. For more information see cron(8), crontab(5), and <filename>/usr/share/doc/cron/README.Debian</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:199 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Further Reading and Information" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:200 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you need information about a particular program, you should first try <userinput>man <replaceable>program</replaceable></userinput>, or <userinput>info <replaceable>program</replaceable></userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:206 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There is lots of useful documentation in <filename>/usr/share/doc</filename> as well. In particular, <filename>/usr/share/doc/HOWTO</filename> and <filename>/usr/share/doc/FAQ</filename> contain lots of interesting information. To submit bugs, look at <filename>/usr/share/doc/debian/bug*</filename>. To read about &debian;-specific issues for particular programs, look at <filename>/usr/share/doc/(package name)/README.Debian</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:217 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://www.debian.org/\">Debian web site</ulink> contains a large quantity of documentation about &debian;. In particular, see the <ulink url=\"http://www.debian.org/doc/FAQ/\">Debian GNU/Linux FAQ</ulink> and the <ulink url=\"http://www.debian.org/doc/user-manuals#quick-reference\">Debian Reference</ulink>. An index of more &debian; documentation is available from the <ulink url=\"http://www.debian.org/doc/ddp\">Debian Documentation Project</ulink>. The &debian; community is self-supporting; to subscribe to one or more of the Debian mailing lists, see the <ulink url=\"http://www.debian.org/MailingLists/subscribe\"> Mail List Subscription</ulink> page. Last, but not least, the <ulink url=\"http://lists.debian.org/\">Debian Mailing List Archives</ulink> contain a wealth of information on &debian;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:235 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A general source of information on GNU/Linux is the <ulink url=\"http://www.tldp.org/\">Linux Documentation Project</ulink>. There you will find the HOWTOs and pointers to other very valuable information on parts of a GNU/Linux system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:251 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Setting Up Your System To Use E-Mail" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:252 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Today, email is an important part of many people's life. As there are many options as to how to set it up, and as having it set up correctly is important for some &debian; utilities, we will try to cover the basics in this section." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:259 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There are three main functions that make up an e-mail system. First there is the <firstterm>Mail User Agent</firstterm> (MUA) which is the program a user actually uses to compose and read mails. Then there is the <firstterm>Mail Transfer Agent</firstterm> (MTA) that takes care of transferring messages from one computer to another. And last there is the <firstterm>Mail Delivery Agent</firstterm> (MDA) that takes care of delivering incoming mail to the user's inbox." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:269 +#, no-c-format +msgid "These three functions can be performed by separate programs, but they can also be combined in one or two programs. It is also possible to have different programs handle these functions for different types of mail." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:275 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On Linux and Unix systems <command>mutt</command> is historically a very popular MUA. Like most traditional Linux programs it is text based. It is often used in combination with <command>exim</command> or <command>sendmail</command> as MTA and <command>procmail</command> as MDA." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:282 +#, no-c-format +msgid "With the increasing popularity of graphical desktop systems, the use of graphical e-mail programs like GNOME's <command>evolution</command>, KDE's <command>kmail</command> or Mozilla's <command>thunderbird</command> (in &debian; available as <command>icedove</command><footnote> <para> The reason that <command>thunderbird</command> has been renamed to <command>icedove</command> in &debian; has to do with licensing issues. Details are outside the scope of this manual. </para> </footnote>) is becoming more popular. These programs combine the function of a MUA, MTA and MDA, but can — and often are — also be used in combination with the traditional Linux tools." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:302 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Default E-Mail Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:303 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Even if you are planning to use a graphical mail program, it is important that a traditional MTA/MDA is also installed and correctly set up on your &debian-gnu; system. Reason is that various utilities running on the system<footnote> <para> Examples are: <command>cron</command>, <command>quota</command>, <command>logcheck</command>, <command>aide</command>, … </para> </footnote> can send important notices by e-mail to inform the system administrator of (potential) problems or changes." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:318 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For this reason the packages <classname>exim4</classname> and <classname>mutt</classname> will be installed by default (provided you did not unselect the <quote>standard</quote> task during the installation). <classname>exim4</classname> is a combination MTA/MDA that is relatively small but very flexible. By default it will be configured to only handle e-mail local to the system itself and e-mails addressed to the system administrator (root account) will be delivered to the regular user account created during the installation<footnote> <para> The forwarding of mail for root to the regular user account is configured in <filename>/etc/aliases</filename>. If no regular user account was created, the mail will of course be delivered to the root account itself. </para> </footnote>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:337 +#, no-c-format +msgid "When system e-mails are delivered they are added to a file in <filename>/var/mail/<replaceable>account_name</replaceable></filename>. The e-mails can be read using <command>mutt</command>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:347 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Sending E-Mails Outside The System" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:348 +#, no-c-format +msgid "As mentioned earlier, the installed &debian; system is only set up to handle e-mail local to the system, not for sending mail to others nor for receiving mail from others." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:354 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you would like <classname>exim4</classname> to handle external e-mail, please refer to the next subsection for the basic available configuration options. Make sure to test that mail can be sent and received correctly." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:360 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you intend to use a graphical mail program and use a mail server of your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or your company, there is not really any need to configure <classname>exim4</classname> for handling external e-mail. Just configure your favorite graphical mail program to use the correct servers to send and receive e-mail (how is outside the scope of this manual)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:369 +#, no-c-format +msgid "However, in that case you may need to configure individual utilities to correctly send e-mails. One such utility is <command>reportbug</command>, a program that facilitates submitting bug reports against &debian; packages. By default it expects to be able to use <classname>exim4</classname> to submit bug reports." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:377 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To correctly set up <command>reportbug</command> to use an external mail server, please run the command <command>reportbug --configure</command> and answer <quote>no</quote> to the question if an MTA is available. You will then be asked for the SMTP server to be used for submitting bug reports." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:388 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configuring the Exim4 Mail Transport Agent" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:389 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you would like your system to also handle external e-mail, you will need to reconfigure the <classname>exim4</classname> package<footnote> <para> You can of course also remove <classname>exim4</classname> and replace it with an alternative MTA/MDA. </para> </footnote>:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: post-install.xml:401 +#, no-c-format +msgid "# dpkg-reconfigure exim4-config" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:403 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After entering that command (as root), you will be asked if you want split the configuration into small files. If you are unsure, select the default option." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:409 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Next you will be presented with several common mail scenarios. Choose the one that most closely resembles your needs." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: post-install.xml:418 +#, no-c-format +msgid "internet site" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:419 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Your system is connected to a network and your mail is sent and received directly using SMTP. On the following screens you will be asked a few basic questions, like your machine's mail name, or a list of domains for which you accept or relay mail." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: post-install.xml:430 +#, no-c-format +msgid "mail sent by smarthost" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:431 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In this scenario your outgoing mail is forwarded to another machine, called a <quote>smarthost</quote>, which takes care of sending the message on to its destination. The smarthost also usually stores incoming mail addressed to your computer, so you don't need to be permanently online. That also means you have to download your mail from the smarthost via programs like fetchmail." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:441 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In a lot of cases the smarthost will be your ISP's mail server, which makes this option very suitable for dial-up users. It can also be a company mail server, or even another system on your own network." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: post-install.xml:451 +#, no-c-format +msgid "mail sent by smarthost; no local mail" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:452 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This option is basically the same as the previous one except that the system will not be set up to handle mail for a local e-mail domain. Mail on the system itself (e.g. for the system administrator) will still be handled." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: post-install.xml:463 +#, no-c-format +msgid "local delivery only" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:464 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This is the option your system is configured for by default." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: post-install.xml:472 +#, no-c-format +msgid "no configuration at this time" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:473 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Choose this if you are absolutely convinced you know what you are doing. This will leave you with an unconfigured mail system — until you configure it, you won't be able to send or receive any mail and you may miss some important messages from your system utilities." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:484 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If none of these scenarios suits your needs, or if you need a finer grained setup, you will need to edit configuration files under the <filename>/etc/exim4</filename> directory after the installation is complete. More information about <classname>exim4</classname> may be found under <filename>/usr/share/doc/exim4</filename>; the file <filename>README.Debian.gz</filename> has further details about configuring <classname>exim4</classname> and explains where to find additional documentation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:495 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that sending mail directly to the Internet when you don't have an official domain name, can result in your mail being rejected because of anti-spam measures on receiving servers. Using your ISP's mail server is preferred. If you still do want to send out mail directly, you may want to use a different e-mail address than is generated by default. If you use <classname>exim4</classname> as your MTA, this is possible by adding an entry in <filename>/etc/email-addresses</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:513 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Compiling a New Kernel" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:514 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Why would someone want to compile a new kernel? It is often not necessary since the default kernel shipped with &debian; handles most configurations. Also, &debian; often offers several alternative kernels. So you may want to check first if there is an alternative kernel image package that better corresponds to your hardware. However, it can be useful to compile a new kernel in order to:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:524 +#, no-c-format +msgid "handle special hardware needs, or hardware conflicts with the pre-supplied kernels" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:530 +#, no-c-format +msgid "use options of the kernel which are not supported in the pre-supplied kernels (such as high memory support)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:536 +#, no-c-format +msgid "optimize the kernel by removing useless drivers to speed up boot time" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:541 +#, no-c-format +msgid "create a monolithic instead of a modularized kernel" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:546 +#, no-c-format +msgid "run an updated or development kernel" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:551 +#, no-c-format +msgid "learn more about linux kernels" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:560 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Kernel Image Management" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:561 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Don't be afraid to try compiling the kernel. It's fun and profitable." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:565 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To compile a kernel the &debian; way, you need some packages: <classname>fakeroot</classname>, <classname>kernel-package</classname>, <classname>linux-source-2.6</classname> and a few others which are probably already installed (see <filename>/usr/share/doc/kernel-package/README.gz</filename> for the complete list)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:574 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This method will make a .deb of your kernel source, and, if you have non-standard modules, make a synchronized dependent .deb of those too. It's a better way to manage kernel images; <filename>/boot</filename> will hold the kernel, the System.map, and a log of the active config file for the build." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:582 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that you don't <emphasis>have</emphasis> to compile your kernel the <quote>&debian; way</quote>; but we find that using the packaging system to manage your kernel is actually safer and easier. In fact, you can get your kernel sources right from Linus instead of <classname>linux-source-2.6</classname>, yet still use the <classname>kernel-package</classname> compilation method." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:591 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that you'll find complete documentation on using <classname>kernel-package</classname> under <filename>/usr/share/doc/kernel-package</filename>. This section just contains a brief tutorial." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:598 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hereafter, we'll assume you have free rein over your machine and will extract your kernel source to somewhere in your home directory<footnote> <para> There are other locations where you can extract kernel sources and build your custom kernel, but this is easiest as it does not require special permissions. </para> </footnote>. We'll also assume that your kernel version is &kernelversion;. Make sure you are in the directory to where you want to unpack the kernel sources, extract them using <userinput>tar xjf /usr/src/linux-source-&kernelversion;.tar.bz2</userinput> and change to the directory <filename>linux-source-&kernelversion;</filename> that will have been created." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:618 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Now, you can configure your kernel. Run <userinput>make xconfig</userinput> if X11 is installed, configured and being run; run <userinput>make menuconfig</userinput> otherwise (you'll need <classname>libncurses5-dev</classname> installed). Take the time to read the online help and choose carefully. When in doubt, it is typically better to include the device driver (the software which manages hardware peripherals, such as Ethernet cards, SCSI controllers, and so on) you are unsure about. Be careful: other options, not related to a specific hardware, should be left at the default value if you do not understand them. Do not forget to select <quote>Kernel module loader</quote> in <quote>Loadable module support</quote> (it is not selected by default). If not included, your &debian; installation will experience problems." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:633 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Clean the source tree and reset the <classname>kernel-package</classname> parameters. To do that, do <userinput>make-kpkg clean</userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:638 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Now, compile the kernel: <userinput>fakeroot make-kpkg --initrd --revision=custom.1.0 kernel_image</userinput>. The version number of <quote>1.0</quote> can be changed at will; this is just a version number that you will use to track your kernel builds. Likewise, you can put any word you like in place of <quote>custom</quote> (e.g., a host name). Kernel compilation may take quite a while, depending on the power of your machine." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:648 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Once the compilation is complete, you can install your custom kernel like any package. As root, do <userinput>dpkg -i ../&kernelpackage;-&kernelversion;-<replaceable>subarchitecture</replaceable>_custom.1.0_&architecture;.deb</userinput>. The <replaceable>subarchitecture</replaceable> part is an optional sub-architecture, <phrase arch=\"i386\"> such as <quote>686</quote>, </phrase> depending on what kernel options you set. <userinput>dpkg -i</userinput> will install the kernel, along with some other nice supporting files. For instance, the <filename>System.map</filename> will be properly installed (helpful for debugging kernel problems), and <filename>/boot/config-&kernelversion;</filename> will be installed, containing your current configuration set. Your new kernel package is also clever enough to automatically update your boot loader to use the new kernel. If you have created a modules package, you'll need to install that package as well." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:668 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is time to reboot the system: read carefully any warning that the above step may have produced, then <userinput>shutdown -r now</userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:673 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For more information on &debian; kernels and kernel compilation, see the <ulink url=\"&url-kernel-handbook;\">Debian Linux Kernel Handbook</ulink>. For more information on <classname>kernel-package</classname>, read the fine documentation in <filename>/usr/share/doc/kernel-package</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: post-install.xml:689 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Recovering a Broken System" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:690 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Sometimes, things go wrong, and the system you've carefully installed is no longer bootable. Perhaps the boot loader configuration broke while trying out a change, or perhaps a new kernel you installed won't boot, or perhaps cosmic rays hit your disk and flipped a bit in <filename>/sbin/init</filename>. Regardless of the cause, you'll need to have a system to work from while you fix it, and rescue mode can be useful for this." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:700 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To access rescue mode, type <userinput>rescue</userinput> at the <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt, or boot with the <userinput>rescue/enable=true</userinput> boot parameter. You'll be shown the first few screens of the installer, with a note in the corner of the display to indicate that this is rescue mode, not a full installation. Don't worry, your system is not about to be overwritten! Rescue mode simply takes advantage of the hardware detection facilities available in the installer to ensure that your disks, network devices, and so on are available to you while repairing your system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:715 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Instead of the partitioning tool, you should now be presented with a list of the partitions on your system, and asked to select one of them. Normally, you should select the partition containing the root file system that you need to repair. You may select partitions on RAID and LVM devices as well as those created directly on disks." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:723 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If possible, the installer will now present you with a shell prompt in the file system you selected, which you can use to perform any necessary repairs. <phrase arch=\"any-x86\"> For example, if you need to reinstall the GRUB boot loader into the master boot record of the first hard disk, you could enter the command <userinput>grub-install '(hd0)'</userinput> to do so. </phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:735 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If the installer cannot run a usable shell in the root file system you selected, perhaps because the file system is corrupt, then it will issue a warning and offer to give you a shell in the installer environment instead. You may not have as many tools available in this environment, but they will often be enough to repair your system anyway. The root file system you selected will be mounted on the <filename>/target</filename> directory." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:744 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In either case, after you exit the shell, the system will reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: post-install.xml:748 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Finally, note that repairing broken systems can be difficult, and this manual does not attempt to go into all the things that might have gone wrong or how to fix them. If you have problems, consult an expert." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/po/da/preparing.po b/po/da/preparing.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9378d6304 --- /dev/null +++ b/po/da/preparing.po @@ -0,0 +1,1215 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: d-i-manual_preparing\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: debian-boot@lists.debian.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2012-10-24 19:53+0000\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: application/x-xml2pot; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:5 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Before Installing &debian-gnu;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:6 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This chapter deals with the preparation for installing &debian; before you even boot the installer. This includes backing up your data, gathering information about your hardware, and locating any necessary information." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:19 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Overview of the Installation Process" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:20 +#, no-c-format +msgid "First, just a note about re-installations. With &debian;, a circumstance that will require a complete re-installation of your system is very rare; perhaps mechanical failure of the hard disk would be the most common case." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:27 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Many common operating systems may require a complete installation to be performed when critical failures take place or for upgrades to new OS versions. Even if a completely new installation isn't required, often the programs you use must be re-installed to operate properly in the new OS." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:35 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Under &debian-gnu;, it is much more likely that your OS can be repaired rather than replaced if things go wrong. Upgrades never require a wholesale installation; you can always upgrade in-place. And the programs are almost always compatible with successive OS releases. If a new program version requires newer supporting software, the &debian; packaging system ensures that all the necessary software is automatically identified and installed. The point is, much effort has been put into avoiding the need for re-installation, so think of it as your very last option. The installer is <emphasis>not</emphasis> designed to re-install over an existing system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:48 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Here's a road map for the steps you will take during the installation process." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:56 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Back up any existing data or documents on the hard disk where you plan to install." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:62 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Gather information about your computer and any needed documentation, before starting the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:68 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Create partitionable space for &debian; on your hard disk." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:73 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Locate and/or download the installer software and any specialized driver or firmware files your machine requires." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:79 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Set up boot media such as CDs/DVDs/USB sticks or provide a network boot infrastructure from which the installer can be booted." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:85 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Boot the installation system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:90 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Select the installation language." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:95 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Activate the ethernet network connection, if available." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:101 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configure one network interface." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:106 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Open an ssh connection to the new system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:111 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Attach one or more DASDs (Direct Access Storage Device)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:117 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If necessary, resize existing partitions on your target harddisk to make space for the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:122 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Create and mount the partitions on which &debian; will be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:127 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Watch the automatic download/install/setup of the <firstterm>base system</firstterm>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:133 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Install a <firstterm>boot loader</firstterm> which can start up &debian-gnu; and/or your existing system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:139 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Load the newly installed system for the first time." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:146 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For &arch-title; you have the option of using <phrase arch=\"any-x86\">a</phrase> <phrase arch=\"powerpc\">an experimental</phrase> graphical version of the installation system. For more information about this graphical installer, see <xref linkend=\"graphical\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:154 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you have problems during the installation, it helps to know which packages are involved in which steps. Introducing the leading software actors in this installation drama:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:160 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The installer software, <classname>debian-installer</classname>, is the primary concern of this manual. It detects hardware and loads appropriate drivers, uses <classname>dhcp-client</classname> to set up the network connection, runs <classname>debootstrap</classname> to install the base system packages, and runs <classname>tasksel</classname> to allow you to install certain additional software. Many more actors play smaller parts in this process, but <classname>debian-installer</classname> has completed its task when you load the new system for the first time." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:172 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To tune the system to your needs, <classname>tasksel</classname> allows you to choose to install various predefined bundles of software like a Web server or a Desktop environment." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:178 +#, no-c-format +msgid "One important option during the installation is whether or not to install a graphical desktop environment, consisting of the X Window System and one of the available graphical desktop environments. If you choose not to select the <quote>Desktop environment</quote> task, you will only have a relatively basic, command line driven system. Installing the Desktop environment task is optional because in relation to a text-mode-only system it requires a comparatively large amount of disk space and because many &debian-gnu; systems are servers which don't really have any need for a graphical user interface to do their job." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:191 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Just be aware that the X Window System is completely separate from <classname>debian-installer</classname>, and in fact is much more complicated. Troubleshooting of the X Window System is not within the scope of this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:206 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Back Up Your Existing Data!" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:207 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Before you start, make sure to back up every file that is now on your system. If this is the first time a non-native operating system is going to be installed on your computer, it is quite likely you will need to re-partition your disk to make room for &debian-gnu;. Anytime you partition your disk, you run a risk of losing everything on the disk, no matter what program you use to do it. The programs used in the installation are quite reliable and most have seen years of use; but they are also quite powerful and a false move can cost you. Even after backing up, be careful and think about your answers and actions. Two minutes of thinking can save hours of unnecessary work." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:220 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are creating a multi-boot system, make sure that you have the distribution media of any other present operating systems on hand. Even though this is normally not necessary, there might be situations in which you could be required to reinstall your operating system's boot loader to make the system boot or in a worst case even have to reinstall the complete operating system and restore your previously made backup." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:239 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Information You Will Need" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:242 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Documentation" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:245 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installation Manual" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:247 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This document you are now reading, in plain ASCII, HTML or PDF format." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: itemizedlist +#: preparing.xml:253 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&list-install-manual-files;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:259 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The document you are now reading, which is the official version of the Installation Guide for the &releasename; release of &debian;; available in <ulink url=\"&url-release-area;/installmanual\">various formats and translations</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:268 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The document you are now reading, which is a development version of the Installation Guide for the next release of &debian;; available in <ulink url=\"&url-d-i-alioth-manual;\">various formats and translations</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:280 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hardware documentation" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:281 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Often contains useful information on configuring or using your hardware." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: ulink +#: preparing.xml:292 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The Debian Wiki hardware page" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: ulink +#: preparing.xml:298 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Linux for SPARC Processors FAQ" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: ulink +#: preparing.xml:304 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Linux/Mips website" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:313 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&arch-title; Hardware References" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:314 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Documentation of &arch-title;-specific boot sequence, commands and device drivers (e.g. DASD, XPRAM, Console, OSA, HiperSockets and z/VM interaction)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: ulink +#: preparing.xml:325 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Device Drivers, Features, and Commands (Linux Kernel 2.6.32)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:330 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IBM Redbook describing how Linux can be combined with z/VM on zSeries and &arch-title; hardware." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: ulink +#: preparing.xml:340 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Linux for &arch-title;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:346 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IBM Redbook describing the Linux distributions available for the mainframe. It has no chapter about &debian; but the basic installation concepts are the same across all &arch-title; distributions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: ulink +#: preparing.xml:357 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:367 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Finding Sources of Hardware Information" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:368 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In many cases, the installer will be able to automatically detect your hardware. But to be prepared, we do recommend familiarizing yourself with your hardware before the install." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:374 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hardware information can be gathered from:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:381 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The manuals that come with each piece of hardware." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:386 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The BIOS setup screens of your computer. You can view these screens when you start your computer by pressing a combination of keys. Check your manual for the combination. Often, it is the <keycap>Delete</keycap> or the <keycap>F2</keycap> key, but some manufacturers use other keys or key combinations. Usually upon starting the computer there will be a message stating which key to press to enter the setup screen." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:396 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The cases and boxes for each piece of hardware." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:402 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The System window in the Windows Control Panel." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:408 +#, no-c-format +msgid "System commands or tools in another operating system, including file manager displays. This source is especially useful for information about RAM and hard drive memory." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:415 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Your system administrator or Internet Service Provider. These sources can tell you the settings you need to set up your networking and e-mail." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:427 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hardware Information Helpful for an Install" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:431 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hardware" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:431 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Information You Might Need" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:437 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hard Drives" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:438 +#, no-c-format +msgid "How many you have." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:440 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Their order on the system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:442 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Whether IDE (also known as PATA), SATA or SCSI." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:444 preparing.xml:493 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Available free space." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:445 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:447 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Partitions where other operating systems are installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:475 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Network interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:476 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Type/model of available network interfaces." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:480 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Printer" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:481 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Model and manufacturer." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:485 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Video Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:486 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Type/model and manufacturer." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:490 +#, no-c-format +msgid "DASD" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:491 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Device number(s)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:496 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Network" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:497 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Type of adapter." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:499 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Device numbers." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:500 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Relative adapter number for OSA cards." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:508 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hardware Compatibility" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:510 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Many products work without trouble on &arch-kernel;. Moreover, hardware support in &arch-kernel; is improving daily. However, &arch-kernel; still does not run as many different types of hardware as some operating systems." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:516 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Drivers in &arch-kernel; in most cases are not written for a certain <quote>product</quote> or <quote>brand</quote> from a specific manufacturer, but for a certain hardware/chipset. Many seemingly different products/brands are based on the same hardware design; it is not uncommon that chip manufacturers provide so-called <quote>reference designs</quote> for products based on their chips which are then used by several different device manufacturers and sold under lots of different product or brand names." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:527 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This has advantages and disadvantages. An advantage is that a driver for one chipset works with lots of different products from different manufacturers, as long as their product is based on the same chipset. The disadvantage is that it is not always easy to see which actual chipset is used in a certain product/brand. Unfortunately sometimes device manufacturers change the hardware base of their product without changing the product name or at least the product version number, so that when having two items of the same brand/product name bought at different times, they can sometimes be based on two different chipsets and therefore use two different drivers or there might be no driver at all for one of them." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:540 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For USB and PCI/PCI-Express/ExpressCard devices, a good way to find out on which chipset they are based is to look at their device IDs. All USB/PCI/PCI-Express/ExpressCard devices have so called <quote>vendor</quote> and <quote>product</quote> IDs, and the combination of these two is usually the same for any product based on the same chipset." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:548 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On Linux systems, these IDs can be read with the <command>lsusb</command> command for USB devices and with the <command>lspci -nn</command> command for PCI/PCI-Express/ExpressCard devices. The vendor and product IDs are usually given in the form of two hexadecimal numbers, seperated by a colon, such as <quote>1d6b:0001</quote>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:556 +#, no-c-format +msgid "An example for the output of <command>lsusb</command>: <quote>Bus 001 Device 001: ID 1d6b:0002 Linux Foundation 2.0 root hub</quote>, whereby 1d6b is the vendor ID and 0002 is the product ID." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:562 +#, no-c-format +msgid "An example for the output of <command>lspci -nn</command> for an Ethernet card: <quote>03:00.0 Ethernet controller [0200]: Realtek Semiconductor Co., Ltd. RTL8111/8168B PCI Express Gigabit Ethernet controller [10ec:8168] (rev 06)</quote>. The IDs are given inside the rightmost square brackets, i.e. here 10ec is the vendor- and 8168 is the product ID." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:570 +#, no-c-format +msgid "As another example, a graphics card could give the following output: <quote>04:00.0 VGA compatible controller [0300]: Advanced Micro Devices [AMD] nee ATI RV710 [Radeon HD 4350] [1002:954f]</quote>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:576 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On Windows systems, the IDs for a device can be found in the Windows device manager on the tab <quote>details</quote>, where the vendor ID is prefixed with VEN_ and the product ID is prefixed with DEV_. On Windows 7 systems, you have to select the property <quote>Hardware IDs</quote> in the device manager's details tab to actually see the IDs, as they are not displayed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:586 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Searching on the internet with the vendor/product ID, <quote>&arch-kernel;</quote> and <quote>driver</quote> as the search terms often results in information regarding the driver support status for a certain chipset. If a search for the vendor/product ID does not yield usable results, a search for the chip code names, which are also often provided by lsusb and lspci (<quote>RTL8111</quote>/<quote>RTL8168B</quote> in the network card example and <quote>RV710</quote> in the graphics card example), can help." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:599 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Testing hardware compatibility with a Live-System" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:601 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&debian-gnu; is also available as a so-called <quote>live system</quote> for certain architectures. A live system is a preconfigured ready-to-use system in a compressed format that can be booted and used from a read-only medium like a CD or DVD. Using it by default does not create any permanent changes on your computer. You can change user settings and install additional programs from within the live system, but all this only happens in the computer's RAM, i.e. if you turn off the computer and boot the live system again, everything is reset to its defaults. If you want to see whether your hardware is supported by &debian-gnu;, the easiest way is to run a &debian; live system on it and try it out." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:614 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There are a few limitations in using a live system. The first is that as all changes you do within the live system must be held in your computer's RAM, this only works on systems with enough RAM to do that, so installing additional large software packages may fail due to memory constraints. Another limitation with regards to hardware compatibility testing is that the official &debian-gnu; live system contains only free components, i.e. there are no non-free firmware files included in it. Such non-free packages can of course be installed manually within the system, but there is no automatic detection of required firmware files like in the &d-i;, so installation of non-free components must be done manually if needed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:627 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Information about the available variants of the &debian; live images can be found at the <ulink url=\"&url-debian-live-cd;\">Debian Live Images website</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:641 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Network Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:643 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If your computer is connected to a fixed network (i.e. an Ethernet or equivalent connection — not a dialup/PPP connection) which is administered by somebody else, you should ask your network's system administrator for this information:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:651 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Your host name (you may be able to decide this on your own)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:656 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Your domain name." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:661 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Your computer's IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:666 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The netmask to use with your network." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:671 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The IP address of the default gateway system you should route to, if your network <emphasis>has</emphasis> a gateway." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:677 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The system on your network that you should use as a DNS (Domain Name Service) server." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:685 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If the network you are connected to uses DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) for configuring network settings, you don't need this information because the DHCP server will provide it directly to your computer during the installation process." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:692 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you have internet access via DSL or cable modem (i.e. over a cable tv network) and have a router (often provided preconfigured by your phone or catv provider) which handles your network connectivity, DHCP is usually available by default." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:700 +#, no-c-format +msgid "As a rule of thumb: if you run a Windows system in your home network and did not have to manually perform any network settings there to achieve Internet access, network connectivity in &debian-gnu; will also be configured automatically." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:707 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you use a WLAN/WiFi network, you should find out:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:712 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The ESSID (<quote>network name</quote>) of your wireless network." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:717 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The WEP or WPA/WPA2 security key to access the network (if applicable)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:734 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Meeting Minimum Hardware Requirements" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:735 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Once you have gathered information about your computer's hardware, check that your hardware will let you do the type of installation that you want to do." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:741 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Depending on your needs, you might manage with less than some of the recommended hardware listed in the table below. However, most users risk being frustrated if they ignore these suggestions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:747 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A Pentium 4, 1GHz system is the minimum recommended for a desktop system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:752 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Any OldWorld or NewWorld PowerPC can serve well as a desktop system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:759 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Recommended Minimum System Requirements" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:763 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Install Type" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:764 +#, no-c-format +msgid "RAM (minimal)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:765 +#, no-c-format +msgid "RAM (recommended)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:766 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hard Drive" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:772 +#, no-c-format +msgid "No desktop" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:773 +#, no-c-format +msgid "64 megabytes" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:774 +#, no-c-format +msgid "256 megabytes" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:775 +#, no-c-format +msgid "1 gigabyte" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:777 +#, no-c-format +msgid "With Desktop" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:778 +#, no-c-format +msgid "128 megabytes" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:779 +#, no-c-format +msgid "512 megabytes" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preparing.xml:780 +#, no-c-format +msgid "5 gigabytes" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:785 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The actual minimum memory requirements are a lot less then the numbers listed in this table. Depending on the architecture, it is possible to install &debian; with as little as 20MB (for s390) to 60MB (for amd64). The same goes for the disk space requirements, especially if you pick and choose which applications to install; see <xref linkend=\"tasksel-size-list\"/> for additional information on disk space requirements." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:795 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is possible to run a graphical desktop environment on older or low-end systems, but in that case it is recommended to install a window manager that is less resource-hungry than those of the GNOME or KDE desktop environments; alternatives include <classname>xfce4</classname>, <classname>icewm</classname> and <classname>wmaker</classname>, but there are others to choose from." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:804 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is practically impossible to give general memory or disk space requirements for server installations as those very much depend on what the server is to be used for." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:810 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Remember that these sizes don't include all the other materials which are usually to be found, such as user files, mail, and data. It is always best to be generous when considering the space for your own files and data." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:817 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Disk space required for the smooth operation of the &debian-gnu; system itself is taken into account in these recommended system requirements. Notably, the <filename>/var</filename> partition contains a lot of state information specific to &debian; in addition to its regular contents, like logfiles. The <command>dpkg</command> files (with information on all installed packages) can easily consume 40MB. Also, <command>apt-get</command> puts downloaded packages here before they are installed. You should usually allocate at least 200MB for <filename>/var</filename>, and a lot more if you install a graphical desktop environment." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:841 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Pre-Partitioning for Multi-Boot Systems" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:842 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Partitioning your disk simply refers to the act of breaking up your disk into sections. Each section is then independent of the others. It's roughly equivalent to putting up walls inside a house; if you add furniture to one room it doesn't affect any other room." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:849 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Whenever this section talks about <quote>disks</quote> you should translate this into a DASD or VM minidisk in the &arch-title; world. Also a machine means an LPAR or VM guest in this case." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:855 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you already have an operating system on your system <phrase arch=\"any-x86\"> (Windows 9x, Windows NT/2000/XP/2003/Vista/7, OS/2, MacOS, Solaris, FreeBSD, …) </phrase> <phrase arch=\"s390\"> (VM, z/OS, OS/390, …) </phrase> which uses the whole disk and you want to stick &debian; on the same disk, you will need to repartition it. &debian; requires its own hard disk partitions. It cannot be installed on Windows or MacOS partitions. It may be able to share some partitions with other Unix systems, but that's not covered here. At the very least you will need a dedicated partition for the &debian; root filesystem." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:874 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You can find information about your current partition setup by using a partitioning tool for your current operating system<phrase arch=\"any-x86\">, such as the integrated Disk Manager in Windows or fdisk in DOS</phrase><phrase arch=\"powerpc\">, such as Drive Setup, HD Toolkit, or MacTools</phrase><phrase arch=\"s390\">, such as the VM diskmap</phrase>. Partitioning tools always provide a way to show existing partitions without making changes." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:884 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In general, changing a partition with a file system already on it will destroy any information there. Thus you should always make backups before doing any repartitioning. Using the analogy of the house, you would probably want to move all the furniture out of the way before moving a wall or you risk destroying it." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:892 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Several modern operating systems offer the ability to move and resize certain existing partitions without destroying their contents. This allows making space for additional partitions without losing existing data. Even though this works quite well in most cases, making changes to the partitioning of a disk is an inherently dangerous action and should only be done after having made a full backup of all data. <phrase arch=\"any-x86\">For FAT/FAT32 and NTFS partitions as used by DOS and Windows systems, the ability to move and resize them losslessly is provided both by &d-i; as well as by the integrated Disk Manager of Windows 7. </phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:907 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To losslessly resize an existing FAT or NTFS partition from within &d-i;, go to the partitioning step, select the option for manual partitioning, select the partition to resize, and simply specify its new size." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: emphasis +#: preparing.xml:915 +#, no-c-format +msgid "FIXME: write about HP-UX disks?" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:917 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Creating and deleting partitions can be done from within &d-i; as well as from an existing operating system. As a rule of thumb, partitions should be created by the system for which they are to be used, i.e. partitions to be used by &debian-gnu; should be created from within &d-i; and partitions to be used from another operating system should be created from there. &d-i; is capable of creating non-&arch-kernel; partitions, and partitions created this way usually work without problems when used in other operating systems, but there are a few rare corner cases in which this could cause problems, so if you want to be sure, use the native partitioning tools to create partitions for use by other operating systems." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:930 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are going to install more than one operating system on the same machine, you should install all other system(s) before proceeding with the &debian; installation. Windows and other OS installations may destroy your ability to start &debian;, or encourage you to reformat non-native partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:938 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You can recover from these actions or avoid them, but installing the native system first saves you trouble." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:943 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In order for OpenFirmware to automatically boot &debian-gnu; the &arch-parttype; partitions should appear before all other partitions on the disk, especially MacOS boot partitions. This should be kept in mind when pre-partitioning; you should create a &arch-parttype; placeholder partition to come <emphasis>before</emphasis> the other bootable partitions on the disk. (The small partitions dedicated to Apple disk drivers are not bootable.) You can delete the placeholder with the &debian; partition tools later during the actual install, and replace it with &arch-parttype; partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1019 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Partitioning from SunOS" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1021 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It's perfectly fine to partition from SunOS; in fact, if you intend to run both SunOS and &debian; on the same machine, it is recommended that you partition using SunOS prior to installing &debian;. The Linux kernel understands Sun disk labels, so there are no problems there. SILO supports booting Linux and SunOS from any of EXT2 (Linux), UFS (SunOS), romfs or iso9660 (CDROM) partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1033 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Partitioning from Linux or another OS" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1035 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Whatever system you are using to partition, make sure you create a <quote>Sun disk label</quote> on your boot disk. This is the only kind of partition scheme that the OpenBoot PROM understands, and so it's the only scheme from which you can boot. In <command>fdisk</command>, the <keycap>s</keycap> key is used to create Sun disk labels. You only need to do this on drives that do not already have a Sun disk label. If you are using a drive that was previously formatted using a PC (or other architecture) you must create a new disk label, or problems with the disk geometry will most likely occur." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1047 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You will probably be using <command>SILO</command> as your boot loader (the small program which runs the operating system kernel). <command>SILO</command> has certain requirements for partition sizes and location; see <xref linkend=\"partitioning\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1062 +#, no-c-format +msgid "MacOS/OSX Partitioning" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1064 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The <application>Apple Drive Setup</application> application can be found in the <filename>Utilities</filename> folder on the MacOS CD. It will not adjust existing partitions; it is limited to partitioning the entire disk at once. The disk driver partitions don't show up in <application>Drive Setup</application>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1071 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Remember to create a placeholder partition for GNU/Linux, preferably positioned first in the disk layout. it doesn't matter what type it is, it will be deleted and replaced later inside the &debian-gnu; installer." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1077 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are planning to install both MacOS 9 and OS X, it is best to create separate partitions for OS 9 and OS X. If they are installed on the same partition, <application>Startup Disk</application> (and reboot) must be used to select between the two; the choice between the two systems can't be made at boot time. With separate partitions, separate options for OS 9 and OS X will appear when holding the <keycap>option</keycap> key at boot time, and separate options can be installed in the <application>yaboot</application> boot menu as well. Also, Startup Disk will de-bless all other mountable partitions, which can affect GNU/Linux booting. Both OS 9 and OS X partitions will be accessible from either OS 9 or OS X." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1090 +#, no-c-format +msgid "GNU/Linux is unable to access information on UFS partitions, but does support HFS+ (aka MacOS Extended) partitions. OS X requires one of these two types for its boot partition. MacOS 9 can be installed on either HFS (aka MacOS Standard) or HFS+. To share information between the MacOS and GNU/Linux systems, an exchange partition is handy. HFS, HFS+ and MS-DOS FAT partitions are supported by both MacOS and Linux." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1110 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Pre-Installation Hardware and Operating System Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1111 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This section will walk you through pre-installation hardware setup, if any, that you will need to do prior to installing &debian;. Generally, this involves checking and possibly changing BIOS/system firmware settings for your system. The <quote>BIOS</quote> or <quote>system firmware</quote> is the core software used by the hardware; it is most critically invoked during the bootstrap process (after power-up)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1126 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Invoking the BIOS Set-Up Menu" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1128 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The BIOS provides the basic functions needed to boot your machine and to allow your operating system to access your hardware. Your system provides a BIOS setup menu, which is used to configure the BIOS. To enter the BIOS setup menu you have to press a key or key combination after turning on the computer. Often it is the <keycap>Delete</keycap> or the <keycap>F2</keycap> key, but some manufacturers use other keys. Usually upon starting the computer there will be a message stating which key to press to enter the setup screen." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1142 preparing.xml:1286 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Boot Device Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1144 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Within the BIOS setup menu, you can select which devices shall be checked in which sequence for a bootable operating system. Possible choices usually include the internal harddisks, the CD/DVD-ROM drive and USB mass storage devices such as USB sticks or external USB harddisks. On modern systems there is also often a possibility to enable network booting via PXE." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1152 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Depending on the installation media (CD/DVD ROM, USB stick, network boot) you have chosen you should enable the appropriate boot devices if they are not already enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1158 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Most BIOS versions allow to call up a boot menu on system startup in which you select from which device the computer should start for the current session. If this option is available, the BIOS usually displays a short message like <quote>press <keycap>F12</keycap> for boot menu</quote> on system startup. The actual key used to select this menu varies from system to system; commonly used keys are <keycap>F12</keycap>, <keycap>F11</keycap> and <keycap>F8</keycap>. Choosing a device from this menu does not change the default boot order of the BIOS, i.e. you can start once from a USB stick while having configured the internal harddisk as the normal primary boot device." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1172 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If your BIOS does not provide you with a boot menu to do ad-hoc choices of the current boot device, you have to change your BIOS setup to make the device from which the &d-i; shall be booted the primary boot device." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1178 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Unfortunately some computers contain buggy BIOS versions. Booting &d-i; from a USB stick might not work even if there is an appropriate option in the BIOS setup menu and the stick is selected as the primary boot device. On some of these systems using a USB stick as boot medium is impossible; others can be tricked into booting from the stick by changing the device type in the BIOS setup from the default <quote>USB harddisk</quote> or <quote>USB stick</quote> to <quote>USB ZIP</quote> or <quote>USB CDROM</quote>. <phrase condition=\"isohybrid-supported\"> In particular if you use an isohybrid CD/DVD image on a USB stick (see <xref linkend=\"usb-copy-isohybrid\"/>), changing the device type to <quote>USB CDROM</quote> helps on some BIOSes which will not boot from a USB stick in USB harddisk mode.</phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1203 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Invoking OpenFirmware" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1204 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There is normally no need to set up the BIOS (called OpenFirmware) on &arch-title; systems. PReP and CHRP are equipped with OpenFirmware, but unfortunately, the means you use to invoke it vary from manufacturer to manufacturer. You'll have to consult the hardware documentation which came with your machine." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1212 +#, no-c-format +msgid "On &arch-title; Macintoshes, you invoke OpenFirmware with <keycombo><keycap>Command (cloverleaf/Apple)</keycap><keycap>Option</keycap><keycap>o</keycap><keycap>f</keycap></keycombo> while booting. Generally it will check for these keystrokes after the chime, but the exact timing varies from model to model. See <ulink url=\"&url-netbsd-powerpc-faq;\"></ulink> for more hints." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1220 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "The OpenFirmware prompt looks like this: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "ok\n" + "0 >\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Note that on older model &arch-title; Macs, the default and sometimes hardwired I/O for OpenFirmware user interaction is through the serial (modem) port. If you invoke OpenFirmware on one of these machines, you will just see a black screen. In that case, a terminal program running on another computer, connected to the modem port, is needed to interact with OpenFirmware." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1233 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The OpenFirmware on OldWorld Beige G3 machines, OF versions 2.0f1 and 2.4, is broken. These machines will most likely not be able to boot from the hard drive unless the firmware is patched. A firmware patch is included in the <application>System Disk 2.3.1</application> utility, available from Apple at <ulink url=\"ftp://ftp.apple.com/developer/macosxserver/utilities/SystemDisk2.3.1.smi.bin\"></ulink>. After unpacking the utility in MacOS, and launching it, select the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to have the firmware patches installed to nvram." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1253 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Invoking OpenBoot" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1255 +#, no-c-format +msgid "OpenBoot provides the basic functions needed to boot the &arch-title; architecture. This is rather similar in function to the BIOS in the x86 architecture, although much nicer. The Sun boot PROMs have a built-in forth interpreter which lets you do quite a number of things with your machine, such as diagnostics and simple scripts." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1263 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To get to the boot prompt you need to hold down the <keycap>Stop</keycap> key (on older type 4 keyboards, use the <keycap>L1</keycap> key, if you have a PC keyboard adapter, use the <keycap>Break</keycap> key) and press the <keycap>A</keycap> key. The boot PROM will give you a prompt, either <userinput>ok</userinput> or <userinput>></userinput>. It is preferred to have the <userinput>ok</userinput> prompt. So if you get the old style prompt, hit the <keycap>n</keycap> key to get the new style prompt." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1275 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are using a serial console, send a break to the machine. With Minicom, use <keycap>Ctrl-A F</keycap>, with cu, hit <keycap>Enter</keycap>, then type <userinput>%~break</userinput>. Consult the documentation of your terminal emulator if you are using a different program." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1288 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You can use OpenBoot to boot from specific devices, and also to change your default boot device. However, you need to know some details about how OpenBoot names devices; it's considerably different from Linux device naming, described in <xref linkend=\"device-names\"/>. Also, the command will vary a bit, depending on what version of OpenBoot you have. More information about OpenBoot can be found in the <ulink url=\"&url-openboot;\">Sun OpenBoot Reference</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1298 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Typically, with newer revisions, you can use OpenBoot devices such as <quote>floppy</quote>, <quote>cdrom</quote>, <quote>net</quote>, <quote>disk</quote>, or <quote>disk2</quote>. These have the obvious meanings; the <quote>net</quote> device is for booting from the network. Additionally, the device name can specify a particular partition of a disk, such as <quote>disk2:a</quote> to boot disk2, first partition. Full OpenBoot device names have the form: <informalexample> <screen>\n" + "<replaceable>driver-name</replaceable>@\n" + "<replaceable>unit-address</replaceable>:\n" + "<replaceable>device-arguments</replaceable>\n" + "</screen></informalexample> In older revisions of OpenBoot, device naming is a bit different: the floppy device is called <quote>/fd</quote>, and SCSI disk devices are of the form <quote>sd(<replaceable>controller</replaceable>, <replaceable>disk-target-id</replaceable>, <replaceable>disk-lun</replaceable>)</quote>. The command <userinput>show-devs</userinput> in newer OpenBoot revisions is useful for viewing the currently configured devices. For full information, whatever your revision, see the <ulink url=\"&url-openboot;\">Sun OpenBoot Reference</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1321 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "To boot from a specific device, use the command <userinput>boot <replaceable>device</replaceable></userinput>. You can set this behavior as the default using the <userinput>setenv</userinput> command. However, the name of the variable to set changed between OpenBoot revisions. In OpenBoot 1.x, use the command <userinput>setenv boot-from <replaceable>device</replaceable></userinput>. In later revisions of OpenBoot, use the command <userinput>setenv boot-device <replaceable>device</replaceable></userinput>. Note, this is also configurable using the <command>eeprom</command> command on Solaris, or modifying the appropriate files in <filename>/proc/openprom/options/</filename>, for example under Linux: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# echo disk1:1 > /proc/openprom/options/boot-device\n" + "</screen></informalexample> and under Solaris:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preparing.xml:1340 +#, no-c-format +msgid "eeprom boot-device=disk1:1" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1350 +#, no-c-format +msgid "BIOS Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1351 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In order to install &debian-gnu; on a &arch-title; or zSeries machine you have first boot a kernel into the system. The boot mechanism of this platform is inherently different to other ones, especially from PC-like systems: there are no floppy devices available at all. You will notice another big difference while you work with this platform: most (if not all) of the time you will work remote, with the help of some client session software like telnet, or a browser. This is due to that special system architecture where the 3215/3270 console is line-based instead of character-based." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1363 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Linux on this platform runs either natively on the bare machine, in a so-called LPAR (Logical Partition) or in a virtual machine supplied by the VM system. You can use a boot tape on all of those systems; you may use some other boot media, too, but those may not be generally available. For example, you can use the virtual card reader of a virtual machine, or boot from the HMC (Hardware Management Console) of an LPAR if the HMC and this option is available for you." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1373 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Before you actually perform an installation, you have to go over some design and preparation steps. IBM has made documentation available about the whole process, e.g. how to prepare an installation medium and how actually to boot from that medium. Duplicating that information here is neither possible nor necessary. However, we will describe here which kind of &debian;-specific data is needed and where to find it. Using both sources of information, you have to prepare your machine and the installation medium before you can perform a boot from it. When you see the welcome message in your client session, return to this document to go through the &debian;-specific installation steps." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1390 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Native and LPAR installations" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1391 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Please refer to chapter 5 of the <ulink url=\"http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg244987.pdf\"> Linux for &arch-title;</ulink> Redbook and chapter 3.2 of the <ulink url=\"http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf\"> Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions</ulink> Redbook on how to set up an LPAR for Linux." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1405 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installation as a VM guest" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1407 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Please refer to chapter 6 of the <ulink url=\"http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg244987.pdf\"> Linux for &arch-title;</ulink> Redbook and chapter 3.1 of the <ulink url=\"http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/pubs/pdfs/redbooks/sg246264.pdf\"> Linux for IBM eServer zSeries and &arch-title;: Distributions</ulink> Redbook on how to set up a VM guest for running Linux." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1417 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You need to copy all the files from the <filename>generic</filename> sub-directory to your CMS disk. Be sure to transfer <filename>kernel.debian</filename> and <filename>initrd.debian</filename> in binary mode with a fixed record length of 80 characters (by specifying <userinput>BINARY</userinput> and <userinput>LOCSITE FIX 80</userinput> in your FTP client). <filename>parmfile.debian</filename> can be in either ASCII or EBCDIC format. A sample <filename>debian.exec</filename> script, which will punch the files in the proper order, is included with the images." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1434 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Setting up an installation server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1436 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you don't have a connection to the Internet (either directly or via a web proxy) you need to create a local installation server that can be accessed from your S/390. This server keeps all the packages you want to install and must make them available using NFS, HTTP or FTP." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1444 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The installation server needs to copy the exact directory structure from any &debian-gnu; mirror, but only the s390 and architecture-independent files are required. You can also copy the contents of all installation CDs into such a directory tree." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: emphasis +#: preparing.xml:1453 +#, no-c-format +msgid "FIXME: more information needed — from a Redbook?" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1460 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Hardware Issues to Watch Out For" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1463 +#, no-c-format +msgid "USB BIOS support and keyboards" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1464 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you have no PS/2-style keyboard, but only a USB model, on some very old PCs you may need to enable legacy keyboard emulation in your BIOS setup to be able to use your keyboard in the bootloader menu, but this is not an issue for modern systems. If your keyboard does not work in the bootloader menu, consult your mainboard manual and look in the BIOS for <quote>Legacy keyboard emulation</quote> or <quote>USB keyboard support</quote> options." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preparing.xml:1477 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Display-visibility on OldWorld Powermacs" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preparing.xml:1479 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Some OldWorld Powermacs, most notably those with the <quote>control</quote> display driver, may not reliably produce a colormap under Linux when the display is configured for more than 256 colors. If you are experiencing such issues with your display after rebooting (you can sometimes see data on the monitor, but on other occasions cannot see anything) or, if the screen turns black after booting the installer instead of showing you the user interface, try changing your display settings under MacOS to use 256 colors instead of <quote>thousands</quote> or <quote>millions</quote>." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/po/da/preseed.po b/po/da/preseed.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e75d46fd --- /dev/null +++ b/po/da/preseed.po @@ -0,0 +1,1766 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: d-i-manual_preseed\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: debian-boot@lists.debian.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2012-10-24 19:53+0000\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: application/x-xml2pot; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:16 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Automating the installation using preseeding" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:18 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This appendix explains how to preseed answers to questions in &d-i; to automate your installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:23 preseed.xml:685 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The configuration fragments used in this appendix are also available as an example preconfiguration file from &urlset-example-preseed;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:31 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:32 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Preseeding provides a way to set answers to questions asked during the installation process, without having to manually enter the answers while the installation is running. This makes it possible to fully automate most types of installation and even offers some features not available during normal installations." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:40 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Preseeding is not required. If you use an empty preseed file, the installer will behave just the same way as in a normal manual installation. Each question you preseed will (if you got it right!) modify the installation in some way from that baseline." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:50 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Preseeding methods" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:51 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There are three methods that can be used for preseeding: <firstterm>initrd</firstterm>, <firstterm>file</firstterm> and <firstterm>network</firstterm>. Initrd preseeding will work with any installation method and supports preseeding of more things, but it requires the most preparation. File and network preseeding each can be used with different installation methods." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:60 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The following table shows which preseeding methods can be used with which installation methods." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:69 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installation method" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:69 +#, no-c-format +msgid "initrd" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:70 preseed.xml:525 +#, no-c-format +msgid "file" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:70 +#, no-c-format +msgid "network" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:76 +#, no-c-format +msgid "CD/DVD" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:77 preseed.xml:78 preseed.xml:79 preseed.xml:89 preseed.xml:91 preseed.xml:94 preseed.xml:95 preseed.xml:96 preseed.xml:99 preseed.xml:100 preseed.xml:101 preseed.xml:104 preseed.xml:106 preseed.xml:109 preseed.xml:111 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>yes</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:81 +#, no-c-format +msgid "but only if you have network access, and set <literal>preseed/url</literal> appropriately" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:88 +#, no-c-format +msgid "netboot" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:90 preseed.xml:105 preseed.xml:110 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>no</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:93 +#, no-c-format +msgid "hd-media <phrase condition=\"bootable-usb\">(including usb-stick)</phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:98 +#, no-c-format +msgid "floppy based (cd-drivers)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:103 +#, no-c-format +msgid "floppy based (net-drivers)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:108 +#, no-c-format +msgid "generic/tape" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:117 +#, no-c-format +msgid "An important difference between the preseeding methods is the point at which the preconfiguration file is loaded and processed. For initrd preseeding this is right at the start of the installation, before the first question is even asked. For file preseeding this is after the CD or CD image has been loaded. For network preseeding it is only after the network has been configured." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:126 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Obviously, any questions that have been processed before the preconfiguration file is loaded cannot be preseeded (this will include questions that are only displayed at medium or low priority, like the first hardware detection run). <xref linkend=\"preseed-bootparms\"/> offers a way to avoid these questions being asked." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:134 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In order to avoid the questions that would normally appear before the preseeding occurs, you can start the installer in <quote>auto</quote> mode. This delays questions that would normally be asked too early for preseeding (i.e. language, country and keyboard selection) until after the network comes up, thus allowing them to be preseeded. It also runs the installation at critical priority, which avoids many unimportant questions. See <xref linkend=\"preseed-auto\"/> for details." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:148 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Limitations" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:149 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Although most questions used by &d-i; can be preseeded using this method, there are some notable exceptions. You must (re)partition an entire disk or use available free space on a disk; it is not possible to use existing partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:223 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Using preseeding" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:224 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You will first need to create a preconfiguration file and place it in the location from where you want to use it. Creating the preconfiguration file is covered later in this appendix. Putting it in the correct location is fairly straightforward for network preseeding or if you want to read the file off a floppy or usb-stick. If you want to include the file on a CD or DVD, you will have to remaster the ISO image. How to get the preconfiguration file included in the initrd is outside the scope of this document; please consult the developers' documentation for &d-i;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:235 +#, no-c-format +msgid "An example preconfiguration file that you can use as basis for your own preconfiguration file is available from &urlset-example-preseed;. This file is based on the configuration fragments included in this appendix." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:244 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Loading the preconfiguration file" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:245 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are using initrd preseeding, you only have to make sure a file named <filename>preseed.cfg</filename> is included in the root directory of the initrd. The installer will automatically check if this file is present and load it." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:252 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For the other preseeding methods you need to tell the installer what file to use when you boot it. This is normally done by passing the kernel a boot parameter, either manually at boot time or by editing the bootloader configuration file <phrase arch=\"linux-any\">(e.g. <filename>syslinux.cfg</filename>) and adding the parameter to the end of the append line(s) for the kernel.</phrase><phrase arch=\"kfreebsd-any\">(e.g. <filename>grub.cfg</filename>) and adding the parameter as a new <literal>set</literal> line for the kernel.</phrase><phrase arch=\"hurd-any\">(e.g. <filename>grub.cfg</filename>) and adding the parameter to the end of the <filename>gnumach.gz</filename> line.</phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:265 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you do specify the preconfiguration file in the bootloader configuration, you might change the configuration so you don't need to hit enter to boot the installer. <phrase arch=\"linux-any\">For syslinux this means setting the timeout to <literal>1</literal> in <filename>syslinux.cfg</filename>.</phrase><phrase arch=\"kfrebsd-any;hurd-any\">For grub this means setting the timeout to <literal>0</literal> in <filename>grub.cfg</filename>.</phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:274 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To make sure the installer gets the right preconfiguration file, you can optionally specify a checksum for the file. Currently this needs to be a md5sum, and if specified it must match the preconfiguration file or the installer will refuse to use it." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:283 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Boot parameters to specify:\n" + "- if you're netbooting:\n" + " preseed/url=http://host/path/to/preseed.cfg\n" + " preseed/url/checksum=5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d\n" + "\n" + "- if you're booting a remastered CD:\n" + " preseed/file=/cdrom/preseed.cfg\n" + " preseed/file/checksum=5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d\n" + "\n" + "- if you're installing from USB media (put the preconfiguration file in the\n" + " toplevel directory of the USB stick):\n" + " preseed/file=/hd-media/preseed.cfg\n" + " preseed/file/checksum=5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:285 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that <filename>preseed/url</filename> can be shortened to just <filename>url</filename>, <filename>preseed/file</filename> to just <filename>file</filename> and <filename>preseed/file/checksum</filename> to just <filename>preseed-md5</filename> when they are passed as boot parameters." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:296 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Using boot parameters to preseed questions" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:297 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If a preconfiguration file cannot be used to preseed some steps, the install can still be fully automated, since you can pass preseed values on the command line when booting the installer." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:303 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Boot parameters can also be used if you do not really want to use preseeding, but just want to provide an answer for a specific question. Some examples where this can be useful are documented elsewhere in this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:309 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To set a value to be used inside &d-i;, just pass <userinput><replaceable>path/to/variable</replaceable>=<replaceable>value</replaceable></userinput> for any of the preseed variables listed in the examples in this appendix. If a value is to be used to configure packages for the target system, you will need to prepend the <firstterm>owner</firstterm><footnote> <para> The owner of a debconf variable (or template) is normally the name of the package that contains the corresponding debconf template. For variables used in the installer itself the owner is <quote>d-i</quote>. Templates and variables can have more than one owner which helps to determine whether they can be removed from the debconf database if the package is purged. </para> </footnote> of the variable as in <userinput><replaceable>owner</replaceable>:<replaceable>path/to/variable</replaceable>=<replaceable>value</replaceable></userinput>. If you don't specify the owner, the value for the variable will not be copied to the debconf database in the target system and thus remain unused during the configuration of the relevant package." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:332 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Normally, preseeding a question in this way will mean that the question will not be asked. To set a specific default value for a question, but still have the question asked, use <quote>?=</quote> instead of <quote>=</quote> as operator. See also <xref linkend=\"preseed-seenflag\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:339 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that some variables that are frequently set at the boot prompt have a shorter alias. If an alias is available, it is used in the examples in this appendix instead of the full variable. The <literal>preseed/url</literal> variable for example has been aliased as <literal>url</literal>. Another example is the <literal>tasks</literal> alias, which translates to <literal>tasksel:tasksel/first</literal>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:348 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A <quote>--</quote> in the boot options has special meaning. Kernel parameters that appear after the last <quote>--</quote> may be copied into the bootloader configuration for the installed system (if supported by the installer for the bootloader). The installer will automatically filter out any options (like preconfiguration options) that it recognizes." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:357 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Current linux kernels (2.6.9 and later) accept a maximum of 32 command line options and 32 environment options, including any options added by default for the installer. If these numbers are exceeded, the kernel will panic (crash). (For earlier kernels, these numbers were lower.)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:365 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For most installations some of the default options in your bootloader configuration file, like <literal>vga=normal</literal>, may be safely removed which may allow you to add more options for preseeding." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:372 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It may not always be possible to specify values with spaces for boot parameters, even if you delimit them with quotes." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:381 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Auto mode" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:382 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "There are several features of &debian; Installer that combine to allow fairly simple command lines at the boot prompt to result in arbitrarily complex customized automatic installs. To illustrate this, here are some examples that can be used at the boot prompt: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "auto url=autoserver\n" + "</screen></informalexample> This relies on there being a DHCP server that will get the machine to the point where <literal>autoserver</literal> can be resolved by DNS, perhaps after adding the local domain if that was provided by DHCP. If this was done at a site where the domain is <literal>example.com</literal>, and they have a reasonably sane DHCP setup, it would result in the preseed file being retrieved from <literal>http://autoserver.example.com/d-i/&releasename;/./preseed.cfg</literal>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:399 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The last part of that url (<literal>d-i/&releasename;/./preseed.cfg</literal>) is taken from <literal>auto-install/defaultroot</literal>. By default this includes the directory <literal>&releasename;</literal> to allow future versions to specify their own codename and let people migrate forwards in a controlled manner. The <literal>/./</literal> bit is used to indicate a root, relative to which subsequent paths can be anchored (for use in preseed/include and preseed/run). This allows files to be specified either as full URLs, paths starting with / that are thus anchored, or even paths relative to the location where the last preseed file was found. This can be used to construct more portable scripts where an entire hierarchy of scripts can be moved to a new location without breaking it, for example copying the files onto a USB stick when they started out on a web server. In this example, if the preseed file sets <literal>preseed/run</literal> to <literal>/scripts/late_command.sh</literal> then the file will be fetched from <literal>http://autoserver.example.com/d-i/&releasename;/./scripts/late_command.sh</literal>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:419 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "If there is no local DHCP or DNS infrastructure, or if you do not want to use the default path to <filename>preseed.cfg</filename>, you can still use an explicit url, and if you don't use the <literal>/./</literal> element it will be anchored to the start of the path (i.e. the third <literal>/</literal> in the URL). Here is an example that requires minimal support from the local network infrastructure: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "auto url=<replaceable>http://192.168.1.2/path/to/mypreseed.file</replaceable>\n" + "</screen></informalexample> The way this works is that:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:432 +#, no-c-format +msgid "if the URL is missing a protocol, http is assumed," +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:435 +#, no-c-format +msgid "if the hostname section contains no periods, it has the domain derived from DHCP appended to it, and" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:439 +#, no-c-format +msgid "if there's no <literal>/</literal>'s after the hostname, then the default path is added." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:445 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "In addition to specifying the url, you can also specify settings that do not directly affect the behavior of &d-i; itself, but can be passed through to scripts specified using <literal>preseed/run</literal> in the loaded preseed file. At present, the only example of this is <literal>auto-install/classes</literal>, which has an alias <literal>classes</literal>. This can be used thus: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "auto url=<replaceable>example.com</replaceable> classes=<replaceable>class_A;class_B</replaceable>\n" + "</screen></informalexample> The classes could for example denote the type of system to be installed, or the localization to be used." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:459 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is of course possible to extend this concept, and if you do, it is reasonable to use the auto-install namespace for this. So one might have something like <literal>auto-install/style</literal> which is then used in your scripts. If you feel the need to do this, please mention it on the <email>debian-boot@lists.debian.org</email> mailing list so that we can avoid namespace conflicts, and perhaps add an alias for the parameter for you." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:469 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The <literal>auto</literal> boot label is not yet defined everywhere. The same effect may be achieved by simply adding the two parameters <literal>auto=true priority=critical</literal> to the kernel command line. The <literal>auto</literal> parameter is an alias for <literal>auto-install/enable</literal> and setting it to <literal>true</literal> delays the locale and keyboard questions until after there has been a chance to preseed them, while <literal>priority</literal> is an alias for <literal>debconf/priority</literal> and setting it to <literal>critical</literal> stops any questions with a lower priority from being asked." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:483 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Additional options that may be of interest while attempting to automate an install while using DHCP are: <literal>interface=auto netcfg/dhcp_timeout=60</literal> which makes the machine choose the first viable NIC and be more patient about getting a reply to its DHCP query." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:492 +#, no-c-format +msgid "An extensive example of how to use this framework, including example scripts and classes, can be found on the <ulink url=\"http://hands.com/d-i/\">website of its developer</ulink>. The examples available there also show many other nice effects that can be achieved by creative use of preconfiguration." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:503 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Aliases useful with preseeding" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:504 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The following aliases can be useful when using (auto mode) preseeding. Note that these are simply short aliases for question names, and you always need to specify a value as well: for example, <literal>auto=true</literal> or <literal>interface=eth0</literal>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:517 +#, no-c-format +msgid "priority" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:517 +#, no-c-format +msgid "debconf/priority" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:518 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>fb</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:518 +#, no-c-format +msgid "debian-installer/framebuffer" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:519 +#, no-c-format +msgid "language" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:519 +#, no-c-format +msgid "debian-installer/language" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:520 +#, no-c-format +msgid "country" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:520 +#, no-c-format +msgid "debian-installer/country" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:521 +#, no-c-format +msgid "locale" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:521 +#, no-c-format +msgid "debian-installer/locale" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:522 +#, no-c-format +msgid "theme" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:522 +#, no-c-format +msgid "debian-installer/theme" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:523 +#, no-c-format +msgid "auto" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:523 +#, no-c-format +msgid "auto-install/enable" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:524 +#, no-c-format +msgid "classes" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:524 +#, no-c-format +msgid "auto-install/classes" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:525 +#, no-c-format +msgid "preseed/file" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:526 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>url</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:526 +#, no-c-format +msgid "preseed/url" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:527 +#, no-c-format +msgid "domain" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:527 +#, no-c-format +msgid "netcfg/get_domain" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:528 +#, no-c-format +msgid "hostname " +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:528 +#, no-c-format +msgid "netcfg/get_hostname" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:529 +#, no-c-format +msgid "interface" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:529 +#, no-c-format +msgid "netcfg/choose_interface" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:530 +#, no-c-format +msgid "protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:530 +#, no-c-format +msgid "mirror/protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:531 +#, no-c-format +msgid "suite" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:531 +#, no-c-format +msgid "mirror/suite" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:532 +#, no-c-format +msgid "modules" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:532 +#, no-c-format +msgid "anna/choose_modules" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:533 +#, no-c-format +msgid "recommends" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:533 +#, no-c-format +msgid "base-installer/install-recommends" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:534 +#, no-c-format +msgid "tasks" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:534 +#, no-c-format +msgid "tasksel:tasksel/first" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:535 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>desktop</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:535 +#, no-c-format +msgid "tasksel:tasksel/desktop" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:536 +#, no-c-format +msgid "dmraid" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:536 +#, no-c-format +msgid "disk-detect/dmraid/enable" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:537 +#, no-c-format +msgid "keymap" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:537 +#, no-c-format +msgid "keyboard-configuration/xkb-keymap" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:538 +#, no-c-format +msgid "preseed-md5" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: preseed.xml:538 +#, no-c-format +msgid "preseed/file/checksum" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:545 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Using a DHCP server to specify preconfiguration files" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:546 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It's also possible to use DHCP to specify a preconfiguration file to download from the network. DHCP allows specifying a filename. Normally this is a file to netboot, but if it appears to be an URL then installation media that support network preseeding will download the file from the URL and use it as a preconfiguration file. Here is an example of how to set it up in the dhcpd.conf for version 3 of the ISC DHCP server (the dhcp3-server &debian; package)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:557 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "if substring (option vendor-class-identifier, 0, 3) = \"d-i\" {\n" + " filename \"http://host/preseed.cfg\";\n" + "}" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:559 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that the above example limits this filename to DHCP clients that identify themselves as \"d-i\", so it will not affect regular DHCP clients, but only the installer. You can also put the text in a stanza for only one particular host to avoid preseeding all installs on your network." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:566 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A good way to use the DHCP preseeding is to only preseed values specific to your network, such as the &debian; mirror to use. This way installs on your network will automatically get a good mirror selected, but the rest of the installation can be performed interactively. Using DHCP preseeding to fully automate &debian; installs should only be done with care." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:580 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Creating a preconfiguration file" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:581 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The preconfiguration file is in the format used by the <command>debconf-set-selections</command> command. The general format of a line in a preconfiguration file is:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:587 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<owner> <question name> <question type> <value>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:589 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There are a few rules to keep in mind when writing a preconfiguration file." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:596 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Put only a single space or tab between type and value: any additional whitespace will be interpreted as belonging to the value." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:600 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A line can be split into multiple lines by appending a backslash (<quote><literal>\\</literal></quote>) as the line continuation character. A good place to split a line is after the question name; a bad place is between type and value. Split lines will be joined into a single line with all leading/trailing whitespace condensed to a single space." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:607 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For debconf variables (templates) used only in the installer itself, the owner should be set to <quote>d-i</quote>; to preseed variables used in the installed system, the name of the package that contains the corresponding debconf template should be used. Only variables that have their owner set to something other than <quote>d-i</quote> will be propagated to the debconf database for the installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:615 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Most questions need to be preseeded using the values valid in English and not the translated values. However, there are some questions (for example in <classname>partman</classname>) where the translated values need to be used." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:621 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Some questions take a code as value instead of the English text that is shown during installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:627 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The easiest way to create a preconfiguration file is to use the example file linked in <xref linkend=\"preseed-contents\"/> as basis and work from there." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:632 +#, no-c-format +msgid "An alternative method is to do a manual installation and then, after rebooting, use the <command>debconf-get-selections</command> from the <classname>debconf-utils</classname> package to dump both the debconf database and the installer's cdebconf database to a single file:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:639 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "$ debconf-get-selections --installer > <replaceable>file</replaceable>\n" + "$ debconf-get-selections >> <replaceable>file</replaceable>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:641 +#, no-c-format +msgid "However, a file generated in this manner will have some items that should not be preseeded, and the example file is a better starting place for most users." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:649 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This method relies on the fact that, at the end of the installation, the installer's cdebconf database is saved to the installed system in <filename>/var/log/installer/cdebconf</filename>. However, because the database may contain sensitive information, by default the files are only readable by root." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:657 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The directory <filename>/var/log/installer</filename> and all files in it will be deleted from your system if you purge the package <classname>installation-report</classname>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:665 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To check possible values for questions, you can use <command>nano</command> to examine the files in <filename>/var/lib/cdebconf</filename> while an installation is in progress. View <filename>templates.dat</filename> for the raw templates and <filename>questions.dat</filename> for the current values and for the values assigned to variables." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:673 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To check if the format of your preconfiguration file is valid before performing an install, you can use the command <command>debconf-set-selections -c <replaceable>preseed.cfg</replaceable></command>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:684 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Contents of the preconfiguration file (for &releasename;)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:690 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that this example is based on an installation for the Intel x86 architecture. If you are installing a different architecture, some of the examples (like keyboard selection and bootloader installation) may not be relevant and will need to be replaced by debconf settings appropriate for your architecture." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:698 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Details on how the different Debian Installer components actually work can be found in <xref linkend=\"module-details\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:706 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Localization" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:707 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Setting localization values will only work if you are using initrd preseeding. With all other methods the preconfiguration file will only be loaded after these questions have been asked." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:713 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The locale can be used to specify both language and country and can be any combination of a language supported by &d-i; and a recognized country. If the combination does not form a valid locale, the installer will automatically select a locale that is valid for the selected language. To specify the locale as a boot parameter, use <userinput>locale=<replaceable>en_US</replaceable></userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:722 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Although this method is very easy to use, it does not allow preseeding of all possible combinations of language, country and locale<footnote> <para> Preseeding <literal>locale</literal> to <userinput>en_NL</userinput> would for example result in <literal>en_US.UTF-8</literal> as default locale for the installed system. If e.g. <literal>en_GB.UTF-8</literal> is preferred instead, the values will need to be preseeded individually. </para> </footnote>. So alternatively the values can be preseeded individually. Language and country can also be specified as boot parameters." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:737 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# Preseeding only locale sets language, country and locale.\n" + "d-i debian-installer/locale string en_US\n" + "\n" + "# The values can also be preseeded individually for greater flexibility.\n" + "#d-i debian-installer/language string en\n" + "#d-i debian-installer/country string NL\n" + "#d-i debian-installer/locale string en_GB.UTF-8\n" + "# Optionally specify additional locales to be generated.\n" + "#d-i localechooser/supported-locales multiselect en_US.UTF-8, nl_NL.UTF-8" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:739 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Keyboard configuration consists of selecting a keymap and (for non-latin keymaps) a toggle key to switch between the non-latin keymap and the US keymap. Only basic keymap variants are available during installation. Advanced variants are available only in the installed system, through <command>dpkg-reconfigure keyboard-configuration</command>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:747 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# Keyboard selection.\n" + "# keymap is an alias for keyboard-configuration/xkb-keymap\n" + "d-i keymap select us\n" + "# d-i keyboard-configuration/toggle select No toggling" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:749 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To skip keyboard configuration, preseed <classname>keymap</classname> with <userinput>skip-config</userinput>. This will result in the kernel keymap remaining active." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:761 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Network configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:762 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Of course, preseeding the network configuration won't work if you're loading your preconfiguration file from the network. But it's great when you're booting from CD or USB stick. If you are loading preconfiguration files from the network, you can pass network config parameters by using kernel boot parameters." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:770 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you need to pick a particular interface when netbooting before loading a preconfiguration file from the network, use a boot parameter such as <userinput>interface=<replaceable>eth1</replaceable></userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:776 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Although preseeding the network configuration is normally not possible when using network preseeding (using <quote>preseed/url</quote>), you can use the following hack to work around that, for example if you'd like to set a static address for the network interface. The hack is to force the network configuration to run again after the preconfiguration file has been loaded by creating a <quote>preseed/run</quote> script containing the following commands:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:786 +#, no-c-format +msgid "killall.sh; netcfg" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:788 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The following debconf variables are relevant for network configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:794 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# Disable network configuration entirely. This is useful for cdrom\n" + "# installations on non-networked devices where the network questions,\n" + "# warning and long timeouts are a nuisance.\n" + "#d-i netcfg/enable boolean false\n" + "\n" + "# netcfg will choose an interface that has link if possible. This makes it\n" + "# skip displaying a list if there is more than one interface.\n" + "d-i netcfg/choose_interface select auto\n" + "\n" + "# To pick a particular interface instead:\n" + "#d-i netcfg/choose_interface select eth1\n" + "\n" + "# To set a different link detection timeout (default is 3 seconds).\n" + "# Values are interpreted as seconds.\n" + "#d-i netcfg/link_detection_timeout string 10\n" + "\n" + "# If you have a slow dhcp server and the installer times out waiting for\n" + "# it, this might be useful.\n" + "#d-i netcfg/dhcp_timeout string 60\n" + "\n" + "# If you prefer to configure the network manually, uncomment this line and\n" + "# the static network configuration below.\n" + "#d-i netcfg/disable_dhcp boolean true\n" + "\n" + "# If you want the preconfiguration file to work on systems both with and\n" + "# without a dhcp server, uncomment these lines and the static network\n" + "# configuration below.\n" + "#d-i netcfg/dhcp_failed note\n" + "#d-i netcfg/dhcp_options select Configure network manually\n" + "\n" + "# Static network configuration.\n" + "#d-i netcfg/get_nameservers string 192.168.1.1\n" + "#d-i netcfg/get_ipaddress string 192.168.1.42\n" + "#d-i netcfg/get_netmask string 255.255.255.0\n" + "#d-i netcfg/get_gateway string 192.168.1.1\n" + "#d-i netcfg/confirm_static boolean true\n" + "\n" + "# Any hostname and domain names assigned from dhcp take precedence over\n" + "# values set here. However, setting the values still prevents the questions\n" + "# from being shown, even if values come from dhcp.\n" + "d-i netcfg/get_hostname string unassigned-hostname\n" + "d-i netcfg/get_domain string unassigned-domain\n" + "\n" + "# If you want to force a hostname, regardless of what either the DHCP\n" + "# server returns or what the reverse DNS entry for the IP is, uncomment\n" + "# and adjust the following line.\n" + "#d-i netcfg/hostname string somehost\n" + "\n" + "# Disable that annoying WEP key dialog.\n" + "d-i netcfg/wireless_wep string\n" + "# The wacky dhcp hostname that some ISPs use as a password of sorts.\n" + "#d-i netcfg/dhcp_hostname string radish\n" + "\n" + "# If non-free firmware is needed for the network or other hardware, you can\n" + "# configure the installer to always try to load it, without prompting. Or\n" + "# change to false to disable asking.\n" + "#d-i hw-detect/load_firmware boolean true" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:796 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Please note that <command>netcfg</command> will automatically determine the netmask if <classname>netcfg/get_netmask</classname> is not preseeded. In this case, the variable has to be marked as <literal>seen</literal> for automatic installations. Similarly, <command>netcfg</command> will choose an appropriate address if <classname>netcfg/get_gateway</classname> is not set. As a special case, you can set <classname>netcfg/get_gateway</classname> to <quote>none</quote> to specify that no gateway should be used." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:812 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Network console" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:814 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# Use the following settings if you wish to make use of the network-console\n" + "# component for remote installation over SSH. This only makes sense if you\n" + "# intend to perform the remainder of the installation manually.\n" + "#d-i anna/choose_modules string network-console\n" + "#d-i network-console/authorized_keys_url string http://10.0.0.1/openssh-key\n" + "#d-i network-console/password password r00tme\n" + "#d-i network-console/password-again password r00tme" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:819 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Mirror settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:820 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Depending on the installation method you use, a mirror may be used to download additional components of the installer, to install the base system, and to set up the <filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename> for the installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:827 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The parameter <classname>mirror/suite</classname> determines the suite for the installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:832 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The parameter <classname>mirror/udeb/suite</classname> determines the suite for additional components for the installer. It is only useful to set this if components are actually downloaded over the network and should match the suite that was used to build the initrd for the installation method used for the installation. Normally the installer will automatically use the correct value and there should be no need to set this." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:843 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# If you select ftp, the mirror/country string does not need to be set.\n" + "#d-i mirror/protocol string ftp\n" + "d-i mirror/country string manual\n" + "d-i mirror/http/hostname string &archive-mirror;\n" + "d-i mirror/http/directory string /debian\n" + "d-i mirror/http/proxy string\n" + "\n" + "# Suite to install.\n" + "#d-i mirror/suite string testing\n" + "# Suite to use for loading installer components (optional).\n" + "#d-i mirror/udeb/suite string testing" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:848 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Account setup" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:849 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The password for the root account and name and password for a first regular user's account can be preseeded. For the passwords you can use either clear text values or MD5 <emphasis>hashes</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:856 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Be aware that preseeding passwords is not completely secure as everyone with access to the preconfiguration file will have the knowledge of these passwords. Using MD5 hashes is considered slightly better in terms of security but it might also give a false sense of security as access to a MD5 hash allows for brute force attacks." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:866 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# Skip creation of a root account (normal user account will be able to\n" + "# use sudo).\n" + "#d-i passwd/root-login boolean false\n" + "# Alternatively, to skip creation of a normal user account.\n" + "#d-i passwd/make-user boolean false\n" + "\n" + "# Root password, either in clear text\n" + "#d-i passwd/root-password password r00tme\n" + "#d-i passwd/root-password-again password r00tme\n" + "# or encrypted using an MD5 hash.\n" + "#d-i passwd/root-password-crypted password [MD5 hash]\n" + "\n" + "# To create a normal user account.\n" + "#d-i passwd/user-fullname string Debian User\n" + "#d-i passwd/username string debian\n" + "# Normal user's password, either in clear text\n" + "#d-i passwd/user-password password insecure\n" + "#d-i passwd/user-password-again password insecure\n" + "# or encrypted using an MD5 hash.\n" + "#d-i passwd/user-password-crypted password [MD5 hash]\n" + "# Create the first user with the specified UID instead of the default.\n" + "#d-i passwd/user-uid string 1010\n" + "\n" + "# The user account will be added to some standard initial groups. To\n" + "# override that, use this.\n" + "#d-i passwd/user-default-groups string audio cdrom video" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:868 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The <classname>passwd/root-password-crypted</classname> and <classname>passwd/user-password-crypted</classname> variables can also be preseeded with <quote>!</quote> as their value. In that case, the corresponding account is disabled. This may be convenient for the root account, provided of course that an alternative method is set up to allow administrative activities or root login (for instance by using SSH key authentication or <command>sudo</command>)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:878 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The following command can be used to generate an MD5 hash for a password:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:882 +#, no-c-format +msgid "$ printf \"r00tme\" | mkpasswd -s -m md5" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:888 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Clock and time zone setup" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:890 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# Controls whether or not the hardware clock is set to UTC.\n" + "d-i clock-setup/utc boolean true\n" + "\n" + "# You may set this to any valid setting for $TZ; see the contents of\n" + "# /usr/share/zoneinfo/ for valid values.\n" + "d-i time/zone string US/Eastern\n" + "\n" + "# Controls whether to use NTP to set the clock during the install\n" + "d-i clock-setup/ntp boolean true\n" + "# NTP server to use. The default is almost always fine here.\n" + "#d-i clock-setup/ntp-server string ntp.example.com" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:895 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Partitioning" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:896 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Using preseeding to partition the harddisk is limited to what is supported by <classname>partman-auto</classname>. You can choose to partition either existing free space on a disk or a whole disk. The layout of the disk can be determined by using a predefined recipe, a custom recipe from a recipe file or a recipe included in the preconfiguration file." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:904 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Preseeding of advanced partition setups using RAID, LVM and encryption is supported, but not with the full flexibility possible when partitioning during a non-preseeded install." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:910 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The examples below only provide basic information on the use of recipes. For detailed information see the files <filename>partman-auto-recipe.txt</filename> and <filename>partman-auto-raid-recipe.txt</filename> included in the <classname>debian-installer</classname> package. Both files are also available from the <ulink url=\"&url-d-i-gitweb-doc-devel;\">&d-i; source repository</ulink>. Note that the supported functionality may change between releases." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:924 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The identification of disks is dependent on the order in which their drivers are loaded. If there are multiple disks in the system, make very sure the correct one will be selected before using preseeding." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:933 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Partitioning example" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:935 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# If the system has free space you can choose to only partition that space.\n" + "# This is only honoured if partman-auto/method (below) is not set.\n" + "#d-i partman-auto/init_automatically_partition select biggest_free\n" + "\n" + "# Alternatively, you may specify a disk to partition. If the system has only\n" + "# one disk the installer will default to using that, but otherwise the device\n" + "# name must be given in traditional, non-devfs format (so e.g. /dev/hda or\n" + "# /dev/sda, and not e.g. /dev/discs/disc0/disc).\n" + "# For example, to use the first SCSI/SATA hard disk:\n" + "#d-i partman-auto/disk string /dev/sda\n" + "# In addition, you'll need to specify the method to use.\n" + "# The presently available methods are:\n" + "# - regular: use the usual partition types for your architecture\n" + "# - lvm: use LVM to partition the disk\n" + "# - crypto: use LVM within an encrypted partition\n" + "d-i partman-auto/method string lvm\n" + "\n" + "# If one of the disks that are going to be automatically partitioned\n" + "# contains an old LVM configuration, the user will normally receive a\n" + "# warning. This can be preseeded away...\n" + "d-i partman-lvm/device_remove_lvm boolean true\n" + "# The same applies to pre-existing software RAID array:\n" + "d-i partman-md/device_remove_md boolean true\n" + "# And the same goes for the confirmation to write the lvm partitions.\n" + "d-i partman-lvm/confirm boolean true\n" + "d-i partman-lvm/confirm_nooverwrite boolean true\n" + "\n" + "# You can choose one of the three predefined partitioning recipes:\n" + "# - atomic: all files in one partition\n" + "# - home: separate /home partition\n" + "# - multi: separate /home, /usr, /var, and /tmp partitions\n" + "d-i partman-auto/choose_recipe select atomic\n" + "\n" + "# Or provide a recipe of your own...\n" + "# If you have a way to get a recipe file into the d-i environment, you can\n" + "# just point at it.\n" + "#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe_file string /hd-media/recipe\n" + "\n" + "# If not, you can put an entire recipe into the preconfiguration file in one\n" + "# (logical) line. This example creates a small /boot partition, suitable\n" + "# swap, and uses the rest of the space for the root partition:\n" + "#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe string \\\n" + "# boot-root :: \\\n" + "# 40 50 100 ext3 \\\n" + "# $primary{ } $bootable{ } \\\n" + "# method{ format } format{ } \\\n" + "# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } \\\n" + "# mountpoint{ /boot } \\\n" + "# . \\\n" + "# 500 10000 1000000000 ext3 \\\n" + "# method{ format } format{ } \\\n" + "# use_filesystem{ } filesystem{ ext3 } \\\n" + "# mountpoint{ / } \\\n" + "# . \\\n" + "# 64 512 300% linux-swap \\\n" + "# method{ swap } format{ } \\\n" + "# .\n" + "\n" + "# The full recipe format is documented in the file partman-auto-recipe.txt\n" + "# included in the 'debian-installer' package or available from D-I source\n" + "# repository. This also documents how to specify settings such as file\n" + "# system labels, volume group names and which physical devices to include\n" + "# in a volume group.\n" + "\n" + "# This makes partman automatically partition without confirmation, provided\n" + "# that you told it what to do using one of the methods above.\n" + "d-i partman-partitioning/confirm_write_new_label boolean true\n" + "d-i partman/choose_partition select finish\n" + "d-i partman/confirm boolean true\n" + "d-i partman/confirm_nooverwrite boolean true" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:939 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Partitioning using RAID" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:940 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You can also use preseeding to set up partitions on software RAID arrays. Supported are RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6 and 10, creating degraded arrays and specifying spare devices." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:946 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are using RAID 1, you can preseed grub to install to all devices used in the array; see <xref linkend=\"preseed-bootloader\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:953 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This type of automated partitioning is easy to get wrong. It is also functionality that receives relatively little testing from the developers of &d-i;. The responsibility to get the various recipes right (so they make sense and don't conflict) lies with the user. Check <filename>/var/log/syslog</filename> if you run into problems." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:963 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# The method should be set to \"raid\".\n" + "#d-i partman-auto/method string raid\n" + "# Specify the disks to be partitioned. They will all get the same layout,\n" + "# so this will only work if the disks are the same size.\n" + "#d-i partman-auto/disk string /dev/sda /dev/sdb\n" + "\n" + "# Next you need to specify the physical partitions that will be used. \n" + "#d-i partman-auto/expert_recipe string \\\n" + "# multiraid :: \\\n" + "# 1000 5000 4000 raid \\\n" + "# $primary{ } method{ raid } \\\n" + "# . \\\n" + "# 64 512 300% raid \\\n" + "# method{ raid } \\\n" + "# . \\\n" + "# 500 10000 1000000000 raid \\\n" + "# method{ raid } \\\n" + "# .\n" + "\n" + "# Last you need to specify how the previously defined partitions will be\n" + "# used in the RAID setup. Remember to use the correct partition numbers\n" + "# for logical partitions. RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6 and 10 are supported;\n" + "# devices are separated using \"#\".\n" + "# Parameters are:\n" + "# <raidtype> <devcount> <sparecount> <fstype> <mountpoint> \\\n" + "# <devices> <sparedevices>\n" + "\n" + "#d-i partman-auto-raid/recipe string \\\n" + "# 1 2 0 ext3 / \\\n" + "# /dev/sda1#/dev/sdb1 \\\n" + "# . \\\n" + "# 1 2 0 swap - \\\n" + "# /dev/sda5#/dev/sdb5 \\\n" + "# . \\\n" + "# 0 2 0 ext3 /home \\\n" + "# /dev/sda6#/dev/sdb6 \\\n" + "# .\n" + "\n" + "# For additional information see the file partman-auto-raid-recipe.txt\n" + "# included in the 'debian-installer' package or available from D-I source\n" + "# repository.\n" + "\n" + "# This makes partman automatically partition without confirmation.\n" + "d-i partman-md/confirm boolean true\n" + "d-i partman-partitioning/confirm_write_new_label boolean true\n" + "d-i partman/choose_partition select finish\n" + "d-i partman/confirm boolean true\n" + "d-i partman/confirm_nooverwrite boolean true" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:968 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Controlling how partitions are mounted" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:969 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Normally, filesystems are mounted using a universally unique identifier (UUID) as a key; this allows them to be mounted properly even if their device name changes. UUIDs are long and difficult to read, so, if you prefer, the installer can mount filesystems based on the traditional device names, or based on a label you assign. If you ask the installer to mount by label, any filesystems without a label will be mounted using a UUID instead." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:978 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Devices with stable names, such as LVM logical volumes, will continue to use their traditional names rather than UUIDs." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:985 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Traditional device names may change based on the order in which the kernel discovers devices at boot, which may cause the wrong filesystem to be mounted. Similarly, labels are likely to clash if you plug in a new disk or a USB drive, and if that happens your system's behaviour when started will be random." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:995 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# The default is to mount by UUID, but you can also choose \"traditional\" to\n" + "# use traditional device names, or \"label\" to try filesystem labels before\n" + "# falling back to UUIDs.\n" + "#d-i partman/mount_style select uuid" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:1001 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Base system installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:1002 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There is actually not very much that can be preseeded for this stage of the installation. The only questions asked concern the installation of the kernel." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:1009 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# Configure APT to not install recommended packages by default. Use of this\n" + "# option can result in an incomplete system and should only be used by very\n" + "# experienced users.\n" + "#d-i base-installer/install-recommends boolean false\n" + "\n" + "# The kernel image (meta) package to be installed; \"none\" can be used if no\n" + "# kernel is to be installed.\n" + "#d-i base-installer/kernel/image string &kernelpackage;-2.6-486" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:1014 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Apt setup" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:1015 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Setup of the <filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename> and basic configuration options is fully automated based on your installation method and answers to earlier questions. You can optionally add other (local) repositories." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:1023 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# You can choose to install non-free and contrib software.\n" + "#d-i apt-setup/non-free boolean true\n" + "#d-i apt-setup/contrib boolean true\n" + "# Uncomment this if you don't want to use a network mirror.\n" + "#d-i apt-setup/use_mirror boolean false\n" + "# Select which update services to use; define the mirrors to be used.\n" + "# Values shown below are the normal defaults.\n" + "#d-i apt-setup/services-select multiselect security, volatile\n" + "#d-i apt-setup/security_host string security.debian.org\n" + "#d-i apt-setup/volatile_host string volatile.debian.org\n" + "\n" + "# Additional repositories, local[0-9] available\n" + "#d-i apt-setup/local0/repository string \\\n" + "# http://local.server/debian stable main\n" + "#d-i apt-setup/local0/comment string local server\n" + "# Enable deb-src lines\n" + "#d-i apt-setup/local0/source boolean true\n" + "# URL to the public key of the local repository; you must provide a key or\n" + "# apt will complain about the unauthenticated repository and so the\n" + "# sources.list line will be left commented out\n" + "#d-i apt-setup/local0/key string http://local.server/key\n" + "\n" + "# By default the installer requires that repositories be authenticated\n" + "# using a known gpg key. This setting can be used to disable that\n" + "# authentication. Warning: Insecure, not recommended.\n" + "#d-i debian-installer/allow_unauthenticated boolean true" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:1028 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Package selection" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:1029 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You can choose to install any combination of tasks that are available. Available tasks as of this writing include:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: userinput +#: preseed.xml:1038 +#, no-c-format +msgid "standard" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: userinput +#: preseed.xml:1041 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<userinput>desktop</userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: userinput +#: preseed.xml:1044 +#, no-c-format +msgid "gnome-desktop" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: userinput +#: preseed.xml:1047 +#, no-c-format +msgid "kde-desktop" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: userinput +#: preseed.xml:1050 +#, no-c-format +msgid "web-server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: userinput +#: preseed.xml:1053 +#, no-c-format +msgid "print-server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: userinput +#: preseed.xml:1056 +#, no-c-format +msgid "dns-server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: userinput +#: preseed.xml:1059 +#, no-c-format +msgid "file-server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: userinput +#: preseed.xml:1062 +#, no-c-format +msgid "mail-server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: userinput +#: preseed.xml:1065 +#, no-c-format +msgid "sql-database" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: userinput +#: preseed.xml:1068 +#, no-c-format +msgid "laptop" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:1072 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You can also choose to install no tasks, and force the installation of a set of packages in some other way. We recommend always including the <userinput>standard</userinput> task." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:1078 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you want to install some individual packages in addition to packages installed by tasks, you can use the parameter <classname>pkgsel/include</classname>. The value of this parameter can be a list of packages separated by either commas or spaces, which allows it to be used easily on the kernel command line as well." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:1088 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "#tasksel tasksel/first multiselect standard, web-server\n" + "# If the desktop task is selected, install the kde and xfce desktops\n" + "# instead of the default gnome desktop.\n" + "#tasksel tasksel/desktop multiselect kde, xfce\n" + "\n" + "# Individual additional packages to install\n" + "#d-i pkgsel/include string openssh-server build-essential\n" + "# Whether to upgrade packages after debootstrap.\n" + "# Allowed values: none, safe-upgrade, full-upgrade\n" + "#d-i pkgsel/upgrade select none\n" + "\n" + "# Some versions of the installer can report back on what software you have\n" + "# installed, and what software you use. The default is not to report back,\n" + "# but sending reports helps the project determine what software is most\n" + "# popular and include it on CDs.\n" + "#popularity-contest popularity-contest/participate boolean false" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:1093 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Boot loader installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:1095 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "<phrase arch=\"linux-any\"># Grub is the default boot loader (for x86). If you want lilo installed\n" + "# instead, uncomment this:\n" + "#d-i grub-installer/skip boolean true\n" + "# To also skip installing lilo, and install no bootloader, uncomment this\n" + "# too:\n" + "#d-i lilo-installer/skip boolean true</phrase>\n" + "<phrase arch=\"kfreebsd-any;hurd-any\"># To install no bootloader, uncomment this\n" + "#d-i grub-installer/skip boolean true</phrase>\n" + "\n" + "# This is fairly safe to set, it makes grub install automatically to the MBR\n" + "# if no other operating system is detected on the machine.\n" + "d-i grub-installer/only_debian boolean true\n" + "\n" + "# This one makes grub-installer install to the MBR if it also finds some other\n" + "# OS, which is less safe as it might not be able to boot that other OS.\n" + "d-i grub-installer/with_other_os boolean true\n" + "\n" + "# Alternatively, if you want to install to a location other than the mbr,\n" + "# uncomment and edit these lines:\n" + "#d-i grub-installer/only_debian boolean false\n" + "#d-i grub-installer/with_other_os boolean false\n" + "#d-i grub-installer/bootdev string (hd0,0)\n" + "# To install grub to multiple disks:\n" + "#d-i grub-installer/bootdev string (hd0,0) (hd1,0) (hd2,0)\n" + "# To install to a particular device:\n" + "#d-i grub-installer/bootdev string /dev/sda\n" + "\n" + "# Optional password for grub, either in clear text\n" + "#d-i grub-installer/password password r00tme\n" + "#d-i grub-installer/password-again password r00tme\n" + "# or encrypted using an MD5 hash, see grub-md5-crypt(8).\n" + "#d-i grub-installer/password-crypted password [MD5 hash]\n" + "\n" + "# Use the following option to add additional boot parameters for the\n" + "# installed system (if supported by the bootloader installer).\n" + "# Note: options passed to the installer will be added automatically.\n" + "#d-i debian-installer/add-kernel-opts string nousb" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:1097 +#, no-c-format +msgid "An MD5 hash for a password for <classname>grub</classname> can be generated using <command>grub-md5-crypt</command>, or using the command from the example in <xref linkend=\"preseed-account\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:1107 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Finishing up the installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:1109 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# During installations from serial console, the regular virtual consoles\n" + "# (VT1-VT6) are normally disabled in /etc/inittab. Uncomment the next\n" + "# line to prevent this.\n" + "#d-i finish-install/keep-consoles boolean true\n" + "\n" + "# Avoid that last message about the install being complete.\n" + "d-i finish-install/reboot_in_progress note\n" + "\n" + "# This will prevent the installer from ejecting the CD during the reboot,\n" + "# which is useful in some situations.\n" + "#d-i cdrom-detect/eject boolean false\n" + "\n" + "# This is how to make the installer shutdown when finished, but not\n" + "# reboot into the installed system.\n" + "#d-i debian-installer/exit/halt boolean true\n" + "# This will power off the machine instead of just halting it.\n" + "#d-i debian-installer/exit/poweroff boolean true" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:1114 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Preseeding other packages" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:1116 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# Depending on what software you choose to install, or if things go wrong\n" + "# during the installation process, it's possible that other questions may\n" + "# be asked. You can preseed those too, of course. To get a list of every\n" + "# possible question that could be asked during an install, do an\n" + "# installation, and then run these commands:\n" + "# debconf-get-selections --installer > file\n" + "# debconf-get-selections >> file" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:1123 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Advanced options" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:1126 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Running custom commands during the installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:1127 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A very powerful and flexible option offered by the preconfiguration tools is the ability to run commands or scripts at certain points in the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:1135 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# d-i preseeding is inherently not secure. Nothing in the installer checks\n" + "# for attempts at buffer overflows or other exploits of the values of a\n" + "# preconfiguration file like this one. Only use preconfiguration files from\n" + "# trusted locations! To drive that home, and because it's generally useful,\n" + "# here's a way to run any shell command you'd like inside the installer,\n" + "# automatically.\n" + "\n" + "# This first command is run as early as possible, just after\n" + "# preseeding is read.\n" + "#d-i preseed/early_command string anna-install some-udeb\n" + "# This command is run immediately before the partitioner starts. It may be\n" + "# useful to apply dynamic partitioner preseeding that depends on the state\n" + "# of the disks (which may not be visible when preseed/early_command runs).\n" + "#d-i partman/early_command \\\n" + "# string debconf-set partman-auto/disk \"$(list-devices disk | head -n1)\"\n" + "# This command is run just before the install finishes, but when there is\n" + "# still a usable /target directory. You can chroot to /target and use it\n" + "# directly, or use the apt-install and in-target commands to easily install\n" + "# packages and run commands in the target system.\n" + "#d-i preseed/late_command string apt-install zsh; in-target chsh -s /bin/zsh" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:1140 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Using preseeding to change default values" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:1141 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "It is possible to use preseeding to change the default answer for a question, but still have the question asked. To do this the <firstterm>seen</firstterm> flag must be reset to <quote>false</quote> after setting the value for a question. <informalexample><screen>\n" + "d-i foo/bar string value\n" + "d-i foo/bar seen false\n" + "</screen></informalexample> The same effect can be achieved for <emphasis>all</emphasis> questions by setting the parameter <classname>preseed/interactive=true</classname> at the boot prompt. This can also be useful for testing or debugging your preconfiguration file." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:1155 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that the <quote>d-i</quote> owner should only be used for variables used in the installer itself. For variables belonging to packages installed on the target system, you should use the name of that package instead. See the footnote to <xref linkend=\"preseed-bootparms\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:1162 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are preseeding using boot parameters, you can make the installer ask the corresponding question by using the <quote>?=</quote> operator, i.e. <userinput><replaceable>foo</replaceable>/<replaceable>bar</replaceable>?=<replaceable>value</replaceable></userinput> (or <userinput><replaceable>owner</replaceable>:<replaceable>foo/bar</replaceable>?=<replaceable>value</replaceable></userinput>). This will of course only have effect for parameters that correspond to questions that are actually displayed during an installation and not for <quote>internal</quote> parameters." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:1172 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For more debugging information, use the boot parameter <classname>DEBCONF_DEBUG=5</classname>. This will cause <classname>debconf</classname> to print much more detail about the current settings of each variable and about its progress through each package's installation scripts." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: preseed.xml:1184 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Chainloading preconfiguration files" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:1185 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is possible to include other preconfiguration files from a preconfiguration file. Any settings in those files will override pre-existing settings from files loaded earlier. This makes it possible to put, for example, general networking settings for your location in one file and more specific settings for certain configurations in other files." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: preseed.xml:1195 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# More than one file can be listed, separated by spaces; all will be\n" + "# loaded. The included files can have preseed/include directives of their\n" + "# own as well. Note that if the filenames are relative, they are taken from\n" + "# the same directory as the preconfiguration file that includes them.\n" + "#d-i preseed/include string x.cfg\n" + "\n" + "# The installer can optionally verify checksums of preconfiguration files\n" + "# before using them. Currently only md5sums are supported, list the md5sums\n" + "# in the same order as the list of files to include.\n" + "#d-i preseed/include/checksum string 5da499872becccfeda2c4872f9171c3d\n" + "\n" + "# More flexibly, this runs a shell command and if it outputs the names of\n" + "# preconfiguration files, includes those files. \n" + "#d-i preseed/include_command \\\n" + "# string if [ \"`hostname`\" = bob ]; then echo bob.cfg; fi\n" + "\n" + "# Most flexibly of all, this downloads a program and runs it. The program\n" + "# can use commands such as debconf-set to manipulate the debconf database.\n" + "# More than one script can be listed, separated by spaces.\n" + "# Note that if the filenames are relative, they are taken from the same\n" + "# directory as the preconfiguration file that runs them.\n" + "#d-i preseed/run string foo.sh" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: preseed.xml:1197 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is also possible to chainload from the initrd or file preseeding phase, into network preseeding by setting preseed/url in the earlier files. This will cause network preseeding to be performed when the network comes up. You need to be careful when doing this, since there will be two distinct runs at preseeding, meaning for example that you get another chance to run the preseed/early command, the second one happening after the network comes up." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/po/da/random-bits.po b/po/da/random-bits.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ff94f432b --- /dev/null +++ b/po/da/random-bits.po @@ -0,0 +1,1582 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: d-i-manual_random-bits\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: debian-boot@lists.debian.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2012-10-24 19:53+0000\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: application/x-xml2pot; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:4 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Random Bits" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:11 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Linux Devices" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:12 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In Linux various special files can be found under the directory <filename>/dev</filename>. These files are called device files and behave unlike ordinary files. The most common types of device files are for block devices and character devices. These files are an interface to the actual driver (part of the Linux kernel) which in turn accesses the hardware. Another, less common, type of device file is the named <firstterm>pipe</firstterm>. The most important device files are listed in the tables below." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:27 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>fd0</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:28 +#, no-c-format +msgid "First Floppy Drive" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:30 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>fd1</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:31 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Second Floppy Drive" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:37 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>hda</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:38 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the first IDE port (Master)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:40 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>hdb</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:41 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the first IDE port (Slave)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:43 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>hdc</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:44 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the second IDE port (Master)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:46 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>hdd</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:47 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IDE Hard disk / CD-ROM on the second IDE port (Slave)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:49 +#, no-c-format +msgid "hda1" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:50 +#, no-c-format +msgid "First partition of the first IDE hard disk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:52 +#, no-c-format +msgid "hdd15" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:53 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Fifteenth partition of the fourth IDE hard disk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:59 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>sda</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:60 +#, no-c-format +msgid "SCSI Hard disk with lowest SCSI ID (e.g. 0)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:62 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>sdb</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:63 +#, no-c-format +msgid "SCSI Hard disk with next higher SCSI ID (e.g. 1)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:65 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>sdc</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:66 +#, no-c-format +msgid "SCSI Hard disk with next higher SCSI ID (e.g. 2)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:68 +#, no-c-format +msgid "sda1" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:69 +#, no-c-format +msgid "First partition of the first SCSI hard disk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:71 +#, no-c-format +msgid "sdd10" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:72 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Tenth partition of the fourth SCSI hard disk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:78 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>sr0</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:79 +#, no-c-format +msgid "SCSI CD-ROM with the lowest SCSI ID" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:81 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>sr1</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:82 +#, no-c-format +msgid "SCSI CD-ROM with the next higher SCSI ID" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:88 +#, no-c-format +msgid "ttyS0" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:89 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Serial port 0, COM1 under MS-DOS" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:91 +#, no-c-format +msgid "ttyS1" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:92 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Serial port 1, COM2 under MS-DOS" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:94 +#, no-c-format +msgid "psaux" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:95 +#, no-c-format +msgid "PS/2 mouse device" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:97 +#, no-c-format +msgid "gpmdata" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:98 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Pseudo device, repeater data from GPM (mouse) daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:104 +#, no-c-format +msgid "cdrom" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:105 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Symbolic link to the CD-ROM drive" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:107 +#, no-c-format +msgid "mouse" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:108 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Symbolic link to the mouse device file" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:114 +#, no-c-format +msgid "null" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:115 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Anything written to this device will disappear" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: random-bits.xml:117 +#, no-c-format +msgid "zero" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:118 +#, no-c-format +msgid "One can endlessly read zeros out of this device" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:125 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Setting Up Your Mouse" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:126 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The mouse can be used in both the Linux console (with gpm) and the X window environment. Normally, this is a simple matter of installing <filename>gpm</filename> and the X server itself. Both should be configured to use <filename>/dev/input/mice</filename> as the mouse device. The correct mouse protocol is named <userinput>exps2</userinput> in gpm, and <userinput>ExplorerPS/2</userinput> in X. The respective configuration files are <filename>/etc/gpm.conf</filename> and <filename>/etc/X11/xorg.conf</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:137 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Certain kernel modules must be loaded in order for your mouse to work. In most cases the correct modules are autodetected, but not always for old-style serial and bus mice<footnote> <para> Serial mice usually have a 9-hole D-shaped connector; bus mice have an 8-pin round connector, not to be confused with the 6-pin round connector of a PS/2 mouse or the 4-pin round connector of an ADB mouse. </para> </footnote>, which are quite rare except on very old computers. Summary of Linux kernel modules needed for different mouse types: <informaltable><tgroup cols=\"2\"><thead> <row> <entry>Module</entry> <entry>Description</entry> </row> </thead><tbody> <row> <entry>psmouse</entry> <entry>PS/2 mice (should be autodetected)</entry> </row> <row> <entry>usbhid</entry> <entry>USB mice (should be autodetected)</entry> </row> <row> <entry>sermouse</entry> <entry>Most serial mice</entry> </row> <row> <entry>logibm</entry> <entry>Bus mouse connected to Logitech adapter card</entry> </row> <row> <entry>inport</entry> <entry>Bus mouse connected to ATI or Microsoft InPort card</entry> </row> </tbody></tgroup></informaltable> To load a mouse driver module, you can use the <command>modconf</command> command (from the package with the same name) and look in the category <userinput>kernel/drivers/input/mouse</userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:184 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Modern kernels give you the capability to emulate a three-button mouse when your mouse only has one button. Just add the following lines to <filename>/etc/sysctl.conf</filename> file." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:191 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# 3-button mouse emulation\n" + "# turn on emulation\n" + "/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button_emulation = 1\n" + "# Send middle mouse button signal with the F11 key\n" + "/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button2_keycode = 87\n" + "# Send right mouse button signal with the F12 key\n" + "/dev/mac_hid/mouse_button3_keycode = 88\n" + "# For different keys, use showkey to tell you what the code is." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:198 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Disk Space Needed for Tasks" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:199 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A standard installation for the amd64 architecture, including all standard packages and using the default 2.6 kernel, takes up &std-system-size;MB of disk space. A minimal base installation, without the <quote>Standard system</quote> task selected, will take &base-system-size;MB." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:207 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In both cases this is the actual disk space used <emphasis>after</emphasis> the installation is finished and any temporary files deleted. It also does not take into account overhead used by the file system, for example for journal files. This means that significantly more disk space is needed both <emphasis>during</emphasis> the installation and for normal system use." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:216 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The following table lists sizes reported by aptitude for the tasks listed in tasksel. Note that some tasks have overlapping constituents, so the total installed size for two tasks together may be less than the total obtained by adding up the numbers." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:223 +#, no-c-format +msgid "By default the installer will install the GNOME desktop environment, but alternative desktop environments can be selected either by using one of the special CD images, or by specifying the desired desktop environment when the installer is booted (see <xref linkend=\"pkgsel\"/>)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:230 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that you will need to add the sizes listed in the table to the size of the standard installation when determining the size of partitions. Most of the size listed as <quote>Installed size</quote> will end up in <filename>/usr</filename> and in <filename>/lib</filename>; the size listed as <quote>Download size</quote> is (temporarily) required in <filename>/var</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:244 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Task" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:245 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installed size (MB)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:246 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Download size (MB)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:247 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Space needed to install (MB)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:253 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Desktop environment" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:254 random-bits.xml:255 random-bits.xml:256 +#, no-c-format +msgid " " +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:259 +#, no-c-format +msgid " • GNOME (default)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:260 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-desktop-gnome-inst;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:261 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-desktop-gnome-dl;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:262 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-desktop-gnome-tot;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:265 +#, no-c-format +msgid " • KDE" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:266 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-desktop-kde-inst;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:267 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-desktop-kde-dl;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:268 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-desktop-kde-tot;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:271 +#, no-c-format +msgid " • Xfce" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:272 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-desktop-xfce-inst;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:273 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-desktop-xfce-dl;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:274 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-desktop-xfce-tot;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:277 +#, no-c-format +msgid " • LXDE" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:278 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-desktop-lxde-inst;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:279 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-desktop-lxde-dl;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:280 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-desktop-lxde-tot;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:284 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Laptop" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:286 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There is some overlap of the Laptop task with the Desktop environment task. If you install both, the Laptop task will only require a few MB additional disk space." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:293 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-laptop-inst;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:294 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-laptop-dl;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:295 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-laptop-tot;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:299 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Web server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:300 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-web-inst;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:301 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-web-dl;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:302 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-web-tot;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:306 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Print server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:307 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-print-inst;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:308 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-print-dl;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:309 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-print-tot;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:313 +#, no-c-format +msgid "DNS server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:314 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-dns-inst;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:315 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-dns-dl;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:316 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-dns-tot;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:320 +#, no-c-format +msgid "File server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:321 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-file-inst;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:322 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-file-dl;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:323 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-file-tot;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:327 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Mail server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:328 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-mail-inst;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:329 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-mail-dl;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:330 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-mail-tot;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:334 +#, no-c-format +msgid "SQL database" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:335 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-sql-inst;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:336 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-sql-dl;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:337 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-sql-tot;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:341 +#, no-c-format +msgid "SSH server" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:342 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-ssh-inst;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:343 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-ssh-dl;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: random-bits.xml:344 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&task-ssh-tot;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:350 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you install in a language other than English, <command>tasksel</command> may automatically install a <firstterm>localization task</firstterm>, if one is available for your language. Space requirements differ per language; you should allow up to 350MB in total for download and installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:365 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installing &debian-gnu; from a Unix/Linux System" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:367 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This section explains how to install &debian-gnu; from an existing Unix or Linux system, without using the menu-driven installer as explained in the rest of the manual. This <quote>cross-install</quote> HOWTO has been requested by users switching to &debian-gnu; from Red Hat, Mandriva, and SUSE. In this section some familiarity with entering *nix commands and navigating the file system is assumed. In this section, <prompt>$</prompt> symbolizes a command to be entered in the user's current system, while <prompt>#</prompt> refers to a command entered in the &debian; chroot." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:379 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Once you've got the new &debian; system configured to your preference, you can migrate your existing user data (if any) to it, and keep on rolling. This is therefore a <quote>zero downtime</quote> &debian-gnu; install. It's also a clever way for dealing with hardware that otherwise doesn't play friendly with various boot or installation media." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:390 +#, no-c-format +msgid "As this is a mostly manual procedure, you should bear in mind that you will need to do a lot of basic configuration of the system yourself, which will also require more knowledge of &debian; and of &arch-kernel; in general than performing a regular installation. You cannot expect this procedure to result in a system that is identical to a system from a regular installation. You should also keep in mind that this procedure only gives the basic steps to set up a system. Additional installation and/or configuration steps may be needed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:404 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Getting Started" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:405 +#, no-c-format +msgid "With your current *nix partitioning tools, repartition the hard drive as needed, creating at least one filesystem plus swap. You need around &base-system-size;MB of space available for a console only install, or about &task-desktop-lxde-inst;MB if you plan to install X (more if you intend to install desktop environments like GNOME or KDE)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:413 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Next, create file systems on the partitions. For example, to create an ext3 file system on partition <filename>/dev/hda6</filename> (that's our example root partition): <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# mke2fs -j /dev/<replaceable>hda6</replaceable>\n" + "</screen></informalexample> To create an ext2 file system instead, omit <userinput>-j</userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:423 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Initialize and activate swap (substitute the partition number for your intended &debian; swap partition): <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# mkswap /dev/<replaceable>hda5</replaceable>\n" + "# sync; sync; sync\n" + "# swapon /dev/<replaceable>hda5</replaceable>\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Mount one partition as <filename>/mnt/debinst</filename> (the installation point, to be the root (<filename>/</filename>) filesystem on your new system). The mount point name is strictly arbitrary, it is referenced later below." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:435 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# mkdir /mnt/debinst\n" + "# mount /dev/<replaceable>hda6</replaceable> /mnt/debinst" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:438 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you want to have parts of the filesystem (e.g. /usr) mounted on separate partitions, you will need to create and mount these directories manually before proceding with the next stage." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:448 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Install <command>debootstrap</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:449 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The utility used by the &debian; installer, and recognized as the official way to install a &debian; base system, is <command>debootstrap</command>. It uses <command>wget</command> and <command>ar</command>, but otherwise depends only on <classname>/bin/sh</classname> and basic Unix/Linux tools<footnote> <para> These include the GNU core utilities and commands like <command>sed</command>, <command>grep</command>, <command>tar</command> and <command>gzip</command>. </para> </footnote>. Install <command>wget</command> and <command>ar</command> if they aren't already on your current system, then download and install <command>debootstrap</command>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:479 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Or, you can use the following procedure to install it manually. Make a work folder for extracting the .deb into: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# mkdir work\n" + "# cd work\n" + "</screen></informalexample> The <command>debootstrap</command> binary is located in the &debian; archive (be sure to select the proper file for your architecture). Download the <command>debootstrap</command> .deb from the <ulink url=\"http://ftp.debian.org/debian/pool/main/d/debootstrap/\"> pool</ulink>, copy the package to the work folder, and extract the files from it. You will need to have root privileges to install the files." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:494 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# ar -x debootstrap_0.X.X_all.deb\n" + "# cd /\n" + "# zcat /full-path-to-work/work/data.tar.gz | tar xv" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:500 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Run <command>debootstrap</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:501 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<command>debootstrap</command> can download the needed files directly from the archive when you run it. You can substitute any &debian; archive mirror for <userinput>&archive-mirror;/debian</userinput> in the command example below, preferably a mirror close to you network-wise. Mirrors are listed at <ulink url=\"http://www.debian.org/mirror/list\"></ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:510 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you have a &releasename; &debian-gnu; CD mounted at <filename>/cdrom</filename>, you could substitute a file URL instead of the http URL: <userinput>file:/cdrom/debian/</userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:516 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Substitute one of the following for <replaceable>ARCH</replaceable> in the <command>debootstrap</command> command: <userinput>amd64</userinput>, <userinput>armel</userinput>, <userinput>armhf</userinput>, <userinput>i386</userinput>, <userinput>ia64</userinput>, <userinput>mips</userinput>, <userinput>mipsel</userinput>, <userinput>powerpc</userinput>, <userinput>s390</userinput>, <userinput>s390x</userinput>, or <userinput>sparc</userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:533 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# /usr/sbin/debootstrap --arch ARCH &releasename; \\\n" + " /mnt/debinst http://ftp.us.debian.org/debian" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:539 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configure The Base System" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:540 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Now you've got a real &debian; system, though rather lean, on disk. <command>chroot</command> into it: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# LANG=C.UTF-8 chroot /mnt/debinst /bin/bash\n" + "</screen></informalexample> After chrooting you may need to set the terminal definition to be compatible with the &debian; base system, for example:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:550 +#, no-c-format +msgid "# export TERM=<replaceable>xterm-color</replaceable>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:555 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Create device files" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:556 +#, no-c-format +msgid "At this point <filename>/dev/</filename> only contains very basic device files. For the next steps of the installation additional device files may be needed. There are different ways to go about this and which method you should use depends on the host system you are using for the installation, on whether you intend to use a modular kernel or not, and on whether you intend to use dynamic (e.g. using <classname>udev</classname>) or static device files for the new system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:566 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A few of the available options are:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:571 +#, no-c-format +msgid "install the makedev package, and create a default set of static device files using (after chrooting)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:575 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# apt-get install makedev\n" + "# cd /dev\n" + "# MAKEDEV generic" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:578 +#, no-c-format +msgid "manually create only specific device files using <command>MAKEDEV</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:583 +#, no-c-format +msgid "bind mount /dev from your host system on top of /dev in the target system; note that the postinst scripts of some packages may try to create device files, so this option should only be used with care" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:596 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Mount Partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:597 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "You need to create <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>. <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# editor /etc/fstab\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Here is a sample you can modify to suit: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# /etc/fstab: static file system information.\n" + "#\n" + "# file system mount point type options dump pass\n" + "/dev/XXX / ext3 defaults 0 1\n" + "/dev/XXX /boot ext3 ro,nosuid,nodev 0 2\n" + "\n" + "/dev/XXX none swap sw 0 0\n" + "proc /proc proc defaults 0 0\n" + "\n" + "/dev/fd0 /media/floppy auto noauto,rw,sync,user,exec 0 0\n" + "/dev/cdrom /media/cdrom iso9660 noauto,ro,user,exec 0 0\n" + "\n" + "/dev/XXX /tmp ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2\n" + "/dev/XXX /var ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2\n" + "/dev/XXX /usr ext3 rw,nodev 0 2\n" + "/dev/XXX /home ext3 rw,nosuid,nodev 0 2\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Use <userinput>mount -a</userinput> to mount all the file systems you have specified in your <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>, or, to mount file systems individually, use: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# mount /path # e.g.: mount /usr\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Current &debian; systems have mountpoints for removable media under <filename>/media</filename>, but keep compatibility symlinks in <filename>/</filename>. Create these as as needed, for example: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# cd /media\n" + "# mkdir cdrom0\n" + "# ln -s cdrom0 cdrom\n" + "# cd /\n" + "# ln -s media/cdrom\n" + "</screen></informalexample> You can mount the proc file system multiple times and to arbitrary locations, though <filename>/proc</filename> is customary. If you didn't use <userinput>mount -a</userinput>, be sure to mount proc before continuing:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:623 +#, no-c-format +msgid "# mount -t proc proc /proc" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:625 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The command <userinput>ls /proc</userinput> should now show a non-empty directory. Should this fail, you may be able to mount proc from outside the chroot:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:631 +#, no-c-format +msgid "# mount -t proc proc /mnt/debinst/proc" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:637 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Setting Timezone" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:638 +#, no-c-format +msgid "An option in the file <filename>/etc/default/rcS</filename> determines whether the system will interpret the hardware clock as being set to UTC or local time. The following command allows you to set that and choose your timezone." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:645 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# editor /etc/default/rcS\n" + "# dpkg-reconfigure tzdata" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:651 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configure Networking" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:652 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "To configure networking, edit <filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename>, <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>, <filename>/etc/hostname</filename> and <filename>/etc/hosts</filename>. <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# editor /etc/network/interfaces\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Here are some simple examples from <filename>/usr/share/doc/ifupdown/examples</filename>: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "######################################################################\n" + "# /etc/network/interfaces -- configuration file for ifup(8), ifdown(8)\n" + "# See the interfaces(5) manpage for information on what options are\n" + "# available.\n" + "######################################################################\n" + "\n" + "# We always want the loopback interface.\n" + "#\n" + "auto lo\n" + "iface lo inet loopback\n" + "\n" + "# To use dhcp:\n" + "#\n" + "# auto eth0\n" + "# iface eth0 inet dhcp\n" + "\n" + "# An example static IP setup: (broadcast and gateway are optional)\n" + "#\n" + "# auto eth0\n" + "# iface eth0 inet static\n" + "# address 192.168.0.42\n" + "# network 192.168.0.0\n" + "# netmask 255.255.255.0\n" + "# broadcast 192.168.0.255\n" + "# gateway 192.168.0.1\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Enter your nameserver(s) and search directives in <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# editor /etc/resolv.conf\n" + "</screen></informalexample> A simple example <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "search hqdom.local\n" + "nameserver 10.1.1.36\n" + "nameserver 192.168.9.100\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Enter your system's host name (2 to 63 characters): <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# echo DebianHostName > /etc/hostname\n" + "</screen></informalexample> And a basic <filename>/etc/hosts</filename> with IPv6 support: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "127.0.0.1 localhost\n" + "127.0.1.1 DebianHostName\n" + "\n" + "# The following lines are desirable for IPv6 capable hosts\n" + "::1 ip6-localhost ip6-loopback\n" + "fe00::0 ip6-localnet\n" + "ff00::0 ip6-mcastprefix\n" + "ff02::1 ip6-allnodes\n" + "ff02::2 ip6-allrouters\n" + "ff02::3 ip6-allhosts\n" + "</screen></informalexample> If you have multiple network cards, you should arrange the names of driver modules in the <filename>/etc/modules</filename> file into the desired order. Then during boot, each card will be associated with the interface name (eth0, eth1, etc.) that you expect." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:693 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configure Apt" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:694 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Debootstrap will have created a very basic <filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename> that will allow installing additional packages. However, you may want to add some additional sources, for example for source packages and security updates: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "deb-src http://ftp.us.debian.org/debian &releasename; main\n" + "\n" + "deb http://security.debian.org/ &releasename;/updates main\n" + "deb-src http://security.debian.org/ &releasename;/updates main\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Make sure to run <userinput>aptitude update</userinput> after you have made changes to the sources list." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:710 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configure Locales and Keyboard" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:711 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "To configure your locale settings to use a language other than English, install the <classname>locales</classname> support package and configure it. Currently the use of UTF-8 locales is recommended. <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# aptitude install locales\n" + "# dpkg-reconfigure locales\n" + "</screen></informalexample> To configure your keyboard (if needed):" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:721 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# aptitude install console-setup\n" + "# dpkg-reconfigure keyboard-configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:723 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that the keyboard cannot be set while in the chroot, but will be configured for the next reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:733 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Install a Kernel" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:734 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you intend to boot this system, you probably want a &arch-kernel; kernel and a boot loader. Identify available pre-packaged kernels with:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:739 +#, no-c-format +msgid "# apt-cache search &kernelpackage;" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:741 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Then install the kernel package of your choice using its package name." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:745 +#, no-c-format +msgid "# aptitude install &kernelpackage;-<replaceable>&kernelversion;-arch-etc</replaceable>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:751 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Set up the Boot Loader" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:752 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To make your &debian-gnu; system bootable, set up your boot loader to load the installed kernel with your new root partition. Note that <command>debootstrap</command> does not install a boot loader, though you can use <command>aptitude</command> inside your &debian; chroot to do so." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:759 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Check <userinput>info grub</userinput> <phrase arch=\"x86\">or <userinput>man lilo.conf</userinput></phrase> for instructions on setting up the bootloader. If you are keeping the system you used to install &debian;, just add an entry for the &debian; install to your existing grub2 <filename>grub.cfg</filename><phrase arch=\"x86\">or <filename>lilo.conf</filename>. For <filename>lilo.conf</filename>, you could also copy it to the new system and edit it there. After you are done editing, call <command>lilo</command> (remember it will use <filename>lilo.conf</filename> relative to the system you call it from)</phrase>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:771 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Installing and setting up <classname>grub2</classname> is as easy as: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# aptitude install grub-pc\n" + "# grub-install /dev/<replaceable>hda</replaceable>\n" + "# update-grub\n" + "</screen></informalexample> The second command will install <command>grub2</command> (in this case in the MBR of <literal>hda</literal>). The last command will create a sane and working <filename>/boot/grub/grub.cfg</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:781 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that this assumes that a <filename>/dev/hda</filename> device file has been created. There are alternative methods to install <command>grub2</command>, but those are outside the scope of this appendix." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:787 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Here is a basic <filename>/etc/lilo.conf</filename> as an example:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:791 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "boot=/dev/<replaceable>hda6</replaceable>\n" + "root=/dev/<replaceable>hda6</replaceable>\n" + "install=menu\n" + "delay=20\n" + "lba32\n" + "image=/vmlinuz\n" + "initrd=/initrd.img\n" + "label=Debian" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:793 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Check <userinput>man yaboot.conf</userinput> for instructions on setting up the bootloader. If you are keeping the system you used to install &debian;, just add an entry for the &debian; install to your existing <filename>yaboot.conf</filename>. You could also copy it to the new system and edit it there. After you are done editing, call ybin (remember it will use <filename>yaboot.conf</filename> relative to the system you call it from)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:803 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Here is a basic <filename>/etc/yaboot.conf</filename> as an example: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "boot=/dev/hda2\n" + "device=hd:\n" + "partition=6\n" + "root=/dev/hda6\n" + "magicboot=/usr/lib/yaboot/ofboot\n" + "timeout=50\n" + "image=/vmlinux\n" + "label=Debian\n" + "</screen></informalexample> On some machines, you may need to use <userinput>ide0:</userinput> instead of <userinput>hd:</userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:816 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Remote access: Installing SSH and setting a password" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:817 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In case you can login to the system via console, you can skip this section. If the system should be accessible via the network later on, you need to install SSH and set a password for root:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:823 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "# aptitude install ssh\n" + "# passwd" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:828 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Finishing touches" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:829 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "As mentioned earlier, the installed system will be very basic. If you would like to make the system a bit more mature, there is an easy method to install all packages with <quote>standard</quote> priority: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# tasksel install standard\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Of course, you can also just use <command>aptitude</command> to install packages individually." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:840 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After the installation there will be a lot of downloaded packages in <filename>/var/cache/apt/archives/</filename>. You can free up some diskspace by running:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:846 +#, no-c-format +msgid "# aptitude clean" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:857 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installing &debian-gnu; over Parallel Line IP (PLIP)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:859 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This section explains how to install &debian-gnu; on a computer without an Ethernet card, but with just a remote gateway computer attached via a Null-Modem cable (also called Null-Printer cable). The gateway computer should be connected to a network that has a &debian; mirror on it (e.g. to the Internet)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:867 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In the example in this appendix we will set up a PLIP connection using a gateway connected to the Internet over a dial-up connection (ppp0). We will use IP addresses 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.0.2 for the PLIP interfaces on the target system and the source system respectively (these addresses should be unused within your network address space)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:875 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The PLIP connection set up during the installation will also be available after the reboot into the installed system (see <xref linkend=\"boot-new\"/>)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:880 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Before you start, you will need to check the BIOS configuration (IO base address and IRQ) for the parallel ports of both the source and target systems. The most common values are <literal>io=0x378</literal>, <literal>irq=7</literal>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:890 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Requirements" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:893 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A target computer, called <emphasis>target</emphasis>, where &debian; will be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:899 +#, no-c-format +msgid "System installation media; see <xref linkend=\"installation-media\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:904 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Another computer connected to the Internet, called <emphasis>source</emphasis>, that will function as the gateway." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:910 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A DB-25 Null-Modem cable. See the <ulink url=\"&url-plip-install-howto;\">PLIP-Install-HOWTO</ulink> for more information on this cable and instructions how to make your own." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:922 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Setting up source" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:923 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The following shell script is a simple example of how to configure the source computer as a gateway to the Internet using ppp0." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: random-bits.xml:928 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "#!/bin/sh\n" + "\n" + "# We remove running modules from kernel to avoid conflicts and to\n" + "# reconfigure them manually.\n" + "modprobe -r lp parport_pc\n" + "modprobe parport_pc io=<replaceable>0x378</replaceable> irq=<replaceable>7</replaceable>\n" + "modprobe plip\n" + "\n" + "# Configure the plip interface (plip0 for me, see dmesg | grep plip)\n" + "ifconfig <replaceable>plip0 192.168.0.2</replaceable> pointopoint <replaceable>192.168.0.1</replaceable> netmask 255.255.255.255 up\n" + "\n" + "# Configure gateway\n" + "modprobe iptable_nat\n" + "iptables -t nat -A POSTROUTING -o <replaceable>ppp0</replaceable> -j MASQUERADE\n" + "echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:934 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installing target" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:935 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Boot the installation media. The installation needs to be run in expert mode; enter <userinput>expert</userinput> at the boot prompt. If you need to set parameters for kernel modules, you also need to do this at the boot prompt. For example, to boot the installer and set values for the <quote>io</quote> and <quote>irq</quote> options for the parport_pc module, enter the following at the boot prompt: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "expert parport_pc.io=<replaceable>0x378</replaceable> parport_pc.irq=<replaceable>7</replaceable>\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Below are the answers that should be given during various stages of the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: guimenuitem +#: random-bits.xml:954 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Load installer components from CD" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:956 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Select the <userinput>plip-modules</userinput> option from the list; this will make the PLIP drivers available to the installation system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: guimenuitem +#: random-bits.xml:964 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Detect network hardware" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:969 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If target <emphasis>does</emphasis> have a network card, a list of driver modules for detected cards will be shown. If you want to force &d-i; to use plip instead, you have to deselect all listed driver modules. Obviously, if target doesn't have a network card, the installer will not show this list." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:978 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Because no network card was detected/selected earlier, the installer will ask you to select a network driver module from a list. Select the <userinput>plip</userinput> module." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: guimenuitem +#: random-bits.xml:990 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configure the network" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:993 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Auto-configure network with DHCP: No" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:998 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IP address: <userinput><replaceable>192.168.0.1</replaceable></userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1003 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Point-to-point address: <userinput><replaceable>192.168.0.2</replaceable></userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1009 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Name server addresses: you can enter the same addresses used on source (see <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:1028 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installing &debian-gnu; using PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1030 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In some countries PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) is a common protocol for broadband (ADSL or cable) connections to an Internet Service Provider. Setting up a network connection using PPPoE is not supported by default in the installer, but can be made to work very simply. This section explains how." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1038 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The PPPoE connection set up during the installation will also be available after the reboot into the installed system (see <xref linkend=\"boot-new\"/>)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1043 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To have the option of setting up and using PPPoE during the installation, you will need to install using one of the CD-ROM/DVD images that are available. It is not supported for other installation methods (e.g. netboot<phrase condition=\"supports-floppy-boot\"> or floppy</phrase>)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1050 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installing over PPPoE is mostly the same as any other installation. The following steps explain the differences." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1058 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Boot the installer with the boot parameter <userinput>modules=ppp-udeb</userinput><footnote arch=\"x86\"> <para> See <xref linkend=\"boot-screen\"/> for information on how to add a boot parameter. </para> </footnote>. This will ensure the component responsible for the setup of PPPoE (<classname>ppp-udeb</classname>) will be loaded and run automatically." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1073 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Follow the regular initial steps of the installation (language, country and keyboard selection; the loading of additional installer components<footnote> <para> The <classname>ppp-udeb</classname> component is loaded as one of the additional components in this step. If you want to install at medium or low priority (expert mode), you can also manually select the <classname>ppp-udeb</classname> instead of entering the <quote>modules</quote> parameter at the boot prompt. </para> </footnote>)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1092 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The next step is the detection of network hardware, in order to identify any Ethernet cards present in the system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1098 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After this the actual setup of PPPoE is started. The installer will probe all the detected Ethernet interfaces in an attempt to find a PPPoE concentrator (a type of server which handles PPPoE connections)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1104 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is possible that the concentrator will not to be found at the first attempt. This can happen occasionally on slow or loaded networks or with faulty servers. In most cases a second attempt to detect the concentrator will be successful; to retry, select <guimenuitem>Configure and start a PPPoE connection</guimenuitem> from the main menu of the installer." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1113 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After a concentrator is found, the user will be prompted to type the login information (the PPPoE username and password)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1119 +#, no-c-format +msgid "At this point the installer will use the provided information to establish the PPPoE connection. If the correct information was provided, the PPPoE connection should be configured and the installer should be able to use it to connect to the Internet and retrieve packages over it (if needed). If the login information is not correct or some error appears, the installer will stop, but the configuration can be attempted again by selecting the menu entry <guimenuitem>Configure and start a PPPoE connection</guimenuitem>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:1139 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The Graphical Installer" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1140 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The graphical version of the installer is only available for a limited number of architectures, including &arch-title;. The functionality of the graphical installer is essentially the same as that of the regular installer as it basically uses the same programs, but with a different frontend." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1148 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Although the functionality is identical, the graphical installer still has a few significant advantages. The main advantage is that it supports more languages, namely those that use a character set that cannot be displayed with the regular <quote>newt</quote> frontend. It also has a few usability advantages such as the option to use a mouse, and in some cases several questions can be displayed on a single screen." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1157 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The graphical installer is available with all CD images and with the hd-media installation method. To boot the graphical installer simply select the relevant option from the boot menu. Expert and rescue mode for the graphical installer can be selected from the <quote>Advanced options</quote> menu. The previously used boot methods <userinput>installgui</userinput>, <userinput>expertgui</userinput> and <userinput>rescuegui</userinput> can still be used from the boot prompt which is shown after selecting the <quote>Help</quote> option in the boot menu." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1168 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There is also a graphical installer image that can be netbooted. And there is a special <quote>mini</quote> ISO image<footnote id=\"gtk-miniiso\"> <para> The mini ISO image can be downloaded from a &debian; mirror as described in <xref linkend=\"downloading-files\"/>. Look for <filename>netboot/gtk/mini.iso</filename>. </para> </footnote>, which is mainly useful for testing." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1181 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For &arch-title;, currently only an experimental <quote>mini</quote> ISO image is available<footnote id=\"gtk-miniiso\"> <para> The mini ISO image can be downloaded from a &debian; mirror as described in <xref linkend=\"downloading-files\"/>. Look for <filename>netboot/gtk/mini.iso</filename>. </para> </footnote>. It should work on almost all PowerPC systems that have an ATI graphical card, but is unlikely to work on other systems." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1195 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Just as with the regular installer it is possible to add boot parameters when starting the graphical installer." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1201 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The graphical installer requires significantly more memory to run than the regular installer: &minimum-memory-gtk;. If insufficient memory is available, it will automatically fall back to the regular <quote>newt</quote> frontend." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1208 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If the amount of memory in your system is below &minimum-memory;, the graphical installer may fail to boot at all while booting the regular installer would still work. Using the regular installer is recommended for systems with little available memory." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: random-bits.xml:1218 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Using the graphical installer" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1219 +#, no-c-format +msgid "As already mentioned, the graphical installer basically works the same as the regular installer and thus the rest of this manual can be used to guide you through the installation process." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1225 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you prefer using the keyboard over the mouse, there are two things you need to know. To expand a collapsed list (used for example for the selection of countries within continents), you can use the <keycap>+</keycap> and <keycap>-</keycap> keys. For questions where more than one item can be selected (e.g. task selection), you first need to tab to the &BTN-CONT; button after making your selections; hitting enter will toggle a selection, not activate &BTN-CONT;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1235 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If a dialog offers additional help information, a <guibutton>Help</guibutton> button will be displayed. The help information can be accessed either by activating the button or by pressing the <keycap>F1</keycap> key." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: random-bits.xml:1241 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To switch to another console, you will also need to use the <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> key, just as with the X Window System. For example, to switch to VT2 (the first debug shell) you would use: <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Left Alt</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap> </keycombo>. The graphical installer itself runs on VT5, so you can use <keycombo> <keycap>Left Alt</keycap> <keycap>F5</keycap> </keycombo> to switch back." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/po/da/using-d-i.po b/po/da/using-d-i.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bbba423e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/po/da/using-d-i.po @@ -0,0 +1,2818 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: d-i-manual_using-d-i\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: debian-boot@lists.debian.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2012-10-24 19:53+0000\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: application/x-xml2pot; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:5 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Using the &debian; Installer" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:7 +#, no-c-format +msgid "How the Installer Works" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:8 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The &debian; Installer consists of a number of special-purpose components to perform each installation task. Each component performs its task, asking the user questions as necessary to do its job. The questions themselves are given priorities, and the priority of questions to be asked is set when the installer is started." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:16 +#, no-c-format +msgid "When a default installation is performed, only essential (high priority) questions will be asked. This results in a highly automated installation process with little user interaction. Components are automatically run in sequence; which components are run depends mainly on the installation method you use and on your hardware. The installer will use default values for questions that are not asked." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:25 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If there is a problem, the user will see an error screen, and the installer menu may be shown in order to select some alternative action. If there are no problems, the user will never see the installer menu, but will simply answer questions for each component in turn. Serious error notifications are set to priority <quote>critical</quote> so the user will always be notified." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:34 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Some of the defaults that the installer uses can be influenced by passing boot arguments when &d-i; is started. If, for example, you wish to force static network configuration (DHCP is used by default if available), you could add the boot parameter <userinput>netcfg/disable_dhcp=true</userinput>. See <xref linkend=\"installer-args\"/> for available options." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:42 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Power users may be more comfortable with a menu-driven interface, where each step is controlled by the user rather than the installer performing each step automatically in sequence. To use the installer in a manual, menu-driven way, add the boot argument <userinput>priority=medium</userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:50 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If your hardware requires you to pass options to kernel modules as they are installed, you will need to start the installer in <quote>expert</quote> mode. This can be done by either using the <command>expert</command> command to start the installer or by adding the boot argument <userinput>priority=low</userinput>. Expert mode gives you full control over &d-i;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:59 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For this architecture the &d-i; supports two different user interfaces: a character-based one and a graphical one. The character-based interface is used by default unless you selected the <quote>Graphical install</quote> option in the initial boot menu. For more information about the graphical installer, please refer to <xref linkend=\"graphical\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:67 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For this architecture the installer uses a character-based user interface. A graphical user interface is currently not available." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:72 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In the character-based environment the use of a mouse is not supported. Here are the keys you can use to navigate within the various dialogs. The <keycap>Tab</keycap> or <keycap>right</keycap> arrow keys move <quote>forward</quote>, and the <keycombo> <keycap>Shift</keycap> <keycap>Tab</keycap> </keycombo> or <keycap>left</keycap> arrow keys move <quote>backward</quote> between displayed buttons and selections. The <keycap>up</keycap> and <keycap>down</keycap> arrow select different items within a scrollable list, and also scroll the list itself. In addition, in long lists, you can type a letter to cause the list to scroll directly to the section with items starting with the letter you typed and use <keycap>Pg-Up</keycap> and <keycap>Pg-Down</keycap> to scroll the list in sections. The <keycap>space bar</keycap> selects an item such as a checkbox. Use &enterkey; to activate choices." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:89 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Some dialogs may offer additional help information. If help is available this will be indicated on the bottom line of the screen by displaying that help information can be accessed by pressing the <keycap>F1</keycap> key." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:95 +#, no-c-format +msgid "S/390 does not support virtual consoles. You may open a second and third ssh session to view the logs described below." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:100 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Error messages and logs are redirected to the fourth console. You can access this console by pressing <keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap><keycap>F4</keycap></keycombo> (hold the left <keycap>Alt</keycap> key while pressing the <keycap>F4</keycap> function key); get back to the main installer process with <keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap><keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:110 +#, no-c-format +msgid "These messages can also be found in <filename>/var/log/syslog</filename>. After installation, this log is copied to <filename>/var/log/installer/syslog</filename> on your new system. Other installation messages may be found in <filename>/var/log/</filename> during the installation, and <filename>/var/log/installer/</filename> after the computer has been booted into the installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:124 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Components Introduction" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:125 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Here is a list of installer components with a brief description of each component's purpose. Details you might need to know about using a particular component are in <xref linkend=\"module-details\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:136 +#, no-c-format +msgid "main-menu" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:136 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Shows the list of components to the user during installer operation, and starts a component when it is selected. Main-menu's questions are set to priority medium, so if your priority is set to high or critical (high is the default), you will not see the menu. On the other hand, if there is an error which requires your intervention, the question priority may be downgraded temporarily to allow you to resolve the problem, and in that case the menu may appear." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:146 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You can get to the main menu by selecting the &BTN-GOBACK; button repeatedly to back all the way out of the currently running component." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:155 +#, no-c-format +msgid "localechooser" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:155 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Allows the user to select localization options for the installation and the installed system: language, country and locales. The installer will display messages in the selected language, unless the translation for that language is not complete in which case some messages may be shown in English." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:167 +#, no-c-format +msgid "console-setup" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:167 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Shows a list of keyboards, from which the user chooses the model which matches his own." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:176 +#, no-c-format +msgid "hw-detect" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:176 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Automatically detects most of the system's hardware, including network cards, disk drives, and PCMCIA." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:185 +#, no-c-format +msgid "cdrom-detect" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:185 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Looks for and mounts a &debian; installation CD." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:193 +#, no-c-format +msgid "netcfg" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:193 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configures the computer's network connections so it can communicate over the internet." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:202 +#, no-c-format +msgid "iso-scan" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:202 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Searches for ISO images (<filename>.iso</filename> files) on hard drives." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:210 +#, no-c-format +msgid "choose-mirror" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:210 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Presents a list of &debian; archive mirrors. The user may choose the source of his installation packages." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:219 +#, no-c-format +msgid "cdrom-checker" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:219 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Checks integrity of a CD-ROM. This way, the user may assure him/herself that the installation CD-ROM was not corrupted." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:228 +#, no-c-format +msgid "lowmem" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:228 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Lowmem tries to detect systems with low memory and then does various tricks to remove unnecessary parts of &d-i; from the memory (at the cost of some features)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:238 +#, no-c-format +msgid "anna" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:238 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Anna's Not Nearly APT. Installs packages which have been retrieved from the chosen mirror or CD." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:247 +#, no-c-format +msgid "user-setup" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:247 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Sets up the root password, and adds a non-root user." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:255 +#, no-c-format +msgid "clock-setup" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:255 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Updates the system clock and determines whether the clock is set to UTC or not." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:264 +#, no-c-format +msgid "tzsetup" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:264 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Selects the time zone, based on the location selected earlier." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:272 +#, no-c-format +msgid "partman" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:272 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Allows the user to partition disks attached to the system, create file systems on the selected partitions, and attach them to the mountpoints. Included are also interesting features like a fully automatic mode or LVM support. This is the preferred partitioning tool in &debian;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:284 +#, no-c-format +msgid "partitioner" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:284 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Allows the user to partition disks attached to the system. A partitioning program appropriate to your computer's architecture is chosen." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:294 +#, no-c-format +msgid "partconf" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:294 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Displays a list of partitions, and creates file systems on the selected partitions according to user instructions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:303 +#, no-c-format +msgid "lvmcfg" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:303 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Helps the user with the configuration of the <firstterm>LVM</firstterm> (Logical Volume Manager)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:312 +#, no-c-format +msgid "mdcfg" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:312 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Allows the user to set up Software <firstterm>RAID</firstterm> (Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks). This Software RAID is usually superior to the cheap IDE (pseudo hardware) RAID controllers found on newer motherboards." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:323 +#, no-c-format +msgid "base-installer" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:323 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installs the most basic set of packages which would allow the computer to operate under &debian-gnu; when rebooted." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:332 +#, no-c-format +msgid "apt-setup" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:332 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configures apt, mostly automatically, based on what media the installer is running from." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:341 +#, no-c-format +msgid "pkgsel" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:341 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Uses <classname>tasksel</classname> to select and install additional software." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:349 +#, no-c-format +msgid "os-prober" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:349 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Detects currently installed operating systems on the computer and passes this information to the bootloader-installer, which may offer you an ability to add discovered operating systems to the bootloader's start menu. This way the user could easily choose at the boot time which operating system to start." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:361 +#, no-c-format +msgid "bootloader-installer" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:361 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The various bootloader installers each install a boot loader program on the hard disk, which is necessary for the computer to start up using &arch-kernel; without using a floppy or CD-ROM. Many boot loaders allow the user to choose an alternate operating system each time the computer boots." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:372 +#, no-c-format +msgid "shell" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:372 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Allows the user to execute a shell from the menu, or in the second console." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:381 +#, no-c-format +msgid "save-logs" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:381 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Provides a way for the user to record information on a floppy disk, network, hard disk, or other media when trouble is encountered, in order to accurately report installer software problems to &debian; developers later." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:399 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Using Individual Components" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:400 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In this section we will describe each installer component in detail. The components have been grouped into stages that should be recognizable for users. They are presented in the order they appear during the install. Note that not all modules will be used for every installation; which modules are actually used depends on the installation method you use and on your hardware." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:412 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Setting up &debian; Installer and Hardware Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:413 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Let's assume the &debian; Installer has booted and you are facing its first screen. At this time, the capabilities of &d-i; are still quite limited. It doesn't know much about your hardware, preferred language, or even the task it should perform. Don't worry. Because &d-i; is quite clever, it can automatically probe your hardware, locate the rest of its components and upgrade itself to a capable installation system. However, you still need to help &d-i; with some information it can't determine automatically (like selecting your preferred language, keyboard layout or desired network mirror)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:426 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You will notice that &d-i; performs <firstterm>hardware detection</firstterm> several times during this stage. The first time is targeted specifically at the hardware needed to load installer components (e.g. your CD-ROM or network card). As not all drivers may be available during this first run, hardware detection needs to be repeated later in the process." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:434 +#, no-c-format +msgid "During hardware detection &d-i; checks if any of the drivers for the hardware devices in your system require firmware to be loaded. If any firmware is requested but unavailable, a dialog will be displayed that allows the missing firmware to be loaded from a removable medium. See <xref linkend=\"loading-firmware\"/> for further details." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:449 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Check available memory / low memory mode" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:451 +#, no-c-format +msgid "One of the first things &d-i; does, is to check available memory. If the available memory is limited, this component will make some changes in the installation process which hopefully will allow you to install &debian-gnu; on your system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:458 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The first measure taken to reduce memory consumption by the installer is to disable translations, which means that the installation can only be done in English. Of course, you can still localize the installed system after the installation has completed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:465 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If that is not sufficient, the installer will further reduce memory consumption by loading only those components essential to complete a basic installation. This reduces the functionality of the installation system. You will be given the opportunity to load additional components manually, but you should be aware that each component you select will use additional memory and thus may cause the installation to fail." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:474 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If the installer runs in low memory mode, it is recommended to create a relatively large swap partition (64–128MB). The swap partition will be used as virtual memory and thus increases the amount of memory available to the system. The installer will activate the swap partition as early as possible in the installation process. Note that heavy use of swap will reduce performance of your system and may lead to high disk activity." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:484 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Despite these measures, it is still possible that your system freezes, that unexpected errors occur or that processes are killed by the kernel because the system runs out of memory (which will result in <quote>Out of memory</quote> messages on VT4 and in the syslog)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:491 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For example, it has been reported that creating a big ext3 file system fails in low memory mode when there is insufficient swap space. If a larger swap doesn't help, try creating the file system as ext2 (which is an essential component of the installer) instead. It is possible to change an ext2 partition to ext3 after the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:499 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is possible to force the installer to use a higher lowmem level than the one based on available memory by using the boot parameter <quote>lowmem</quote> as described in <xref linkend=\"installer-args\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:514 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Selecting Localization Options" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:516 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In most cases the first questions you will be asked concern the selection of localization options to be used both for the installation and for the installed system. The localization options consist of language, location and locales." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:523 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The language you choose will be used for the rest of the installation process, provided a translation of the different dialogs is available. If no valid translation is available for the selected language, the installer will default to English." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:530 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The selected geographic location (in most cases a country) will be used later in the installation process to select the correct time zone and a &debian; mirror appropriate for that country. Language and country together will help determine the default locale for your system and select the correct keyboard layout." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:538 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You will first be asked to select your preferred language. The language names are listed both in English (left side) and in the language itself (right side); the names on the right side are also shown in the proper script for the language. The list is sorted on the English names. At the top of the list is an extra option that allows you to select the <quote>C</quote> locale instead of a language. Choosing the <quote>C</quote> locale will result in the installation proceding in English; the installed system will have no localization support as the <classname>locales</classname> package will not be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:550 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Next you will be asked to select your geographic location. If you selected a language that is recognized as an official language for more than one country<footnote> <para> In technical terms: where multiple locales exist for that language with differing country codes. </para> </footnote>, you will be shown a list of only those countries. To select a country that is not in that list, choose <guimenuitem>other</guimenuitem> (the last option). You will then be presented with a list of continents; selecting a continent will lead to a list of relevant countries on that continent." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:567 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If the language has only one country associated with it, a list of countries will be displayed for the continent or region the country belongs to, with that country selected as the default. Use the <guibutton>Go Back</guibutton> option to select countries on a different continent." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:574 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is important to select the country where you live or where you are located as it determines the time zone that will be configured for the installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:580 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you selected a combination of language and country for which no locale is defined and there exist multiple locales for the language, then the installer will allow you to choose which of those locales you prefer as the default locale for the installed system<footnote> <para> At medium and low priority you can always select your preferred locale from those available for the selected language (if there's more than one). </para> </footnote>. In all other cases a default locale will be selected based on the selected language and country." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:595 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Any default locale selected as described in the previous paragraph will use <firstterm>UTF-8</firstterm> as character encoding." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:600 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are installing at low priority, you will have the option of selecting additional locales, including so-called <quote>legacy</quote> locales<footnote> <para> Legacy locales are locales which do not use UTF-8, but one of the older standards for character encoding such as ISO 8859-1 (used by West European languages) or EUC-JP (used by Japanese). </para> </footnote>, to be generated for the installed system; if you do, you will be asked which of the selected locales should be the default for the installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:624 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Choosing a Keyboard" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:626 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Keyboards are often tailored to the characters used in a language. Select a layout that conforms to the keyboard you are using, or select something close if the keyboard layout you want isn't represented. Once the system installation is complete, you'll be able to select a keyboard layout from a wider range of choices (run <command>dpkg-reconfigure keyboard-configuration</command> as root after you have completed the installation)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:636 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Move the highlight to the keyboard selection you desire and press &enterkey;. Use the arrow keys to move the highlight — they are in the same place in all national language keyboard layouts, so they are independent of the keyboard configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:663 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Looking for the &debian; Installer ISO Image" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:664 +#, no-c-format +msgid "When installing via the <emphasis>hd-media</emphasis> method, there will be a moment where you need to find and mount the &debian; Installer iso image in order to get the rest of the installation files. The component <command>iso-scan</command> does exactly this." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:671 +#, no-c-format +msgid "At first, <command>iso-scan</command> automatically mounts all block devices (e.g. partitions) which have some known filesystem on them and sequentially searches for filenames ending with <filename>.iso</filename> (or <filename>.ISO</filename> for that matter). Beware that the first attempt scans only files in the root directory and in the first level of subdirectories (i.e. it finds <filename>/<replaceable>whatever</replaceable>.iso</filename>, <filename>/data/<replaceable>whatever</replaceable>.iso</filename>, but not <filename>/data/tmp/<replaceable>whatever</replaceable>.iso</filename>). After an iso image has been found, <command>iso-scan</command> checks its content to determine if the image is a valid &debian; iso image or not. In the former case we are done, in the latter <command>iso-scan</command> seeks for another image." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:688 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In case the previous attempt to find an installer iso image fails, <command>iso-scan</command> will ask you whether you would like to perform a more thorough search. This pass doesn't just look into the topmost directories, but really traverses whole filesystem." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:695 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If <command>iso-scan</command> does not discover your installer iso image, reboot back to your original operating system and check if the image is named correctly (ending in <filename>.iso</filename>), if it is placed on a filesystem recognizable by &d-i;, and if it is not corrupted (verify the checksum). Experienced Unix users could do this without rebooting on the second console." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:716 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configuring the Network" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:718 +#, no-c-format +msgid "As you enter this step, if the system detects that you have more than one network device, you'll be asked to choose which device will be your <emphasis>primary</emphasis> network interface, i.e. the one which you want to use for installation. The other interfaces won't be configured at this time. You may configure additional interfaces after installation is complete; see the <citerefentry> <refentrytitle>interfaces</refentrytitle> <manvolnum>5</manvolnum> </citerefentry> man page." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:732 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Automatic network configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:733 +#, no-c-format +msgid "By default, &d-i; tries to configure your computer's network automatically as far as possible. If the automatic configuration fails, that may be caused by many factors ranging from an unplugged network cable to missing infrastructure for automatic configuration. For further explanation in case of errors, check the error messages on the fourth console. In any case, you will be asked if you want to retry, or if you want to perform a manual setup. Sometimes the network services used for autoconfiguration can be slow in their responses, so if you are sure everything is in place, simply start the autoconfiguration attempt again. If autoconfiguration fails repeatedly, you can instead choose the manual network setup." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:752 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Manual network configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:753 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The manual network setup in turn asks you a number of questions about your network, notably <computeroutput>IP address</computeroutput>, <computeroutput>Netmask</computeroutput>, <computeroutput>Gateway</computeroutput>, <computeroutput>Name server addresses</computeroutput>, and a <computeroutput>Hostname</computeroutput>. Moreover, if you have a wireless network interface, you will be asked to provide your <computeroutput>Wireless ESSID</computeroutput> (<quote>wireless network name</quote>) and a <computeroutput>WEP key</computeroutput> or <computeroutput>WPA/WPA2 passphrase</computeroutput>. Fill in the answers from <xref linkend=\"needed-info\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:769 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Some technical details you might, or might not, find handy: the program assumes the network IP address is the bitwise-AND of your system's IP address and your netmask. The default broadcast address is calculated as the bitwise OR of your system's IP address with the bitwise negation of the netmask. It will also guess your gateway. If you can't find any of these answers, use the offered defaults — if necessary, you can change them by editing <filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename> once the system has been installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:784 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IPv4 and IPv6" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:785 +#, no-c-format +msgid "From &debian-gnu; 7.0 (<quote>Wheezy</quote>) onwards, &d-i; supports IPv6 as well as the <quote>classic</quote> IPv4. All combinations of IPv4 and IPv6 (IPv4-only, IPv6-only and dual-stack configurations) are supported." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:791 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Autoconfiguration for IPv4 is done via DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). Autoconfiguration for IPv6 supports stateless autoconfiguration using NDP (Neighbor Discovery Protocol, including recursive DNS server (RDNSS) assignment), stateful autoconfiguration via DHCPv6 and mixed stateless/stateful autoconfiguration (address configuration via NDP, additional parameters via DHCPv6)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:837 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configuring the Clock and Time Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:839 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The installer will first attempt to connect to a time server on the Internet (using the <firstterm>NTP</firstterm> protocol) in order to correctly set the system time. If this does not succeed, the installer will assume the time and date obtained from the system clock when the installation system was booted are correct. It is not possible to manually set the system time during the installation process." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:848 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The installer does not modify the system clock on the s390 platform." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:861 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Depending on the location selected earlier in the installation process, you may be shown a list of time zones relevant for that location. If your location has only one time zone and you are doing a default installation, you will not be asked anything and the system will assume that time zone." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:869 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In expert mode or when installing at medium priority, you will have the additional option to select <quote>Coordinated Universal Time</quote> (UTC) as time zone." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:875 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If for some reason you wish to set a time zone for the installed system that does <emphasis>not</emphasis> match the selected location, there are two options." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:886 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The simplest option is to just select a different time zone after the installation has been completed and you've booted into the new system. The command to do this is:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: screen +#: using-d-i.xml:892 +#, no-c-format +msgid "# dpkg-reconfigure tzdata" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:898 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Alternatively, the time zone can be set at the very start of the installation by passing the parameter <userinput>time/zone=<replaceable>value</replaceable></userinput> when you boot the installation system. The value should of course be a valid time zone, for example <userinput>Europe/London</userinput> or <userinput>UTC</userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:912 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For automated installations the time zone can be set to any desired value using preseeding." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:926 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Setting Up Users And Passwords" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:927 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Just before configuring the clock, the installer will allow you to set up the <quote>root</quote> account and/or an account for the first user. Other user accounts can be created after the installation has been completed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:941 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Set the Root Password" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:945 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The <emphasis>root</emphasis> account is also called the <emphasis>super-user</emphasis>; it is a login that bypasses all security protection on your system. The root account should only be used to perform system administration, and only used for as short a time as possible." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:953 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Any password you create should contain at least 6 characters, and should contain both upper- and lower-case characters, as well as punctuation characters. Take extra care when setting your root password, since it is such a powerful account. Avoid dictionary words or use of any personal information which could be guessed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:961 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If anyone ever tells you they need your root password, be extremely wary. You should normally never give your root password out, unless you are administering a machine with more than one system administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:971 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Create an Ordinary User" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:973 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The system will ask you whether you wish to create an ordinary user account at this point. This account should be your main personal log-in. You should <emphasis>not</emphasis> use the root account for daily use or as your personal login." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:982 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Why not? Well, one reason to avoid using root's privileges is that it is very easy to do irreparable damage as root. Another reason is that you might be tricked into running a <emphasis>Trojan-horse</emphasis> program — that is a program that takes advantage of your super-user powers to compromise the security of your system behind your back. Any good book on Unix system administration will cover this topic in more detail — consider reading one if it is new to you." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:992 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You will first be prompted for the user's full name. Then you'll be asked for a name for the user account; generally your first name or something similar will suffice and indeed will be the default. Finally, you will be prompted for a password for this account." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:999 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If at any point after installation you would like to create another account, use the <command>adduser</command> command." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:1010 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Partitioning and Mount Point Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1011 +#, no-c-format +msgid "At this time, after hardware detection has been executed a final time, &d-i; should be at its full strength, customized for the user's needs and ready to do some real work. As the title of this section indicates, the main task of the next few components lies in partitioning your disks, creating filesystems, assigning mountpoints and optionally configuring closely related options like RAID, LVM or encrypted devices." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1032 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are uncomfortable with partitioning, or just want to know more details, see <xref linkend=\"partitioning\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1038 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "If a hard disk has previously used under Solaris, the partitioner may not detect the size of the drive correctly. Creating a new partition table does not fix this issue. What does help, is to <quote>zero</quote> the first few sectors of the drive: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "# dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/hd<replaceable>X</replaceable> bs=512 count=2; sync\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Note that this will make any existing data on that disk inaccessible." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1051 +#, no-c-format +msgid "First you will be given the opportunity to automatically partition either an entire drive, or available free space on a drive. This is also called <quote>guided</quote> partitioning. If you do not want to autopartition, choose <guimenuitem>Manual</guimenuitem> from the menu." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:1061 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Supported partitioning options" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1062 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The partitioner used in &d-i; is fairly versatile. It allows to create many different partitioning schemes, using various partition tables, file systems and advanced block devices." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1068 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Exactly which options are available depends mainly on the architecture, but also on other factors. For example, on systems with limited internal memory some options may not be available. Defaults may vary as well. The type of partition table used by default can for example be different for large capacity hard disks than for smaller hard disks. Some options can only be changed when installing at medium or low debconf priority; at higher priorities sensible defaults will be used." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1079 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The installer supports various forms of advanced partitioning and use of storage devices, which in many cases can be used in combination." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: emphasis +#: using-d-i.xml:1086 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Logical Volume Management (LVM)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: emphasis +#: using-d-i.xml:1089 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Software RAID" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1090 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Supported are RAID levels 0, 1, 4, 5, 6 and 10." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: emphasis +#: using-d-i.xml:1094 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Encryption" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1096 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis>Serial ATA RAID</emphasis> (using <classname>dmraid</classname>)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1098 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Also called <quote>fake RAID</quote> or <quote>BIOS RAID</quote>. Support for Serial ATA RAID is currently only available if enabled when the installer is booted. Further information is available on <ulink url=\"&url-d-i-sataraid;\">our Wiki</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1104 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis>Multipath</emphasis> (experimental)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1106 +#, no-c-format +msgid "See <ulink url=\"&url-d-i-multipath;\">our Wiki</ulink> for information. Support for multipath is currently only available if enabled when the installer is booted." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1113 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The following file systems are supported." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1118 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<phrase arch=\"arm;mipsel\"><emphasis>ext2r0</emphasis>,</phrase> <emphasis>ext2</emphasis>, <phrase arch=\"linux-any\"><emphasis>ext3</emphasis>,</phrase> <phrase arch=\"linux-any\"><emphasis>ext4</emphasis></phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1123 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The default file system selected in most cases is ext3; for <filename>/boot</filename> partitions ext2 will be selected by default when guided partitioning is used." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1128 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis>jfs</emphasis> (not available on all architectures)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: emphasis +#: using-d-i.xml:1132 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis>ufs</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1133 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The default file system is UFS." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1136 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis>xfs</emphasis> (not available on all architectures)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: emphasis +#: using-d-i.xml:1140 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis>zfs</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1141 +#, no-c-format +msgid "As ZFS support in the installer is still in development, only a basic subset of ZFS features are supported. Some of them can be enabled manually after the initial install, but there are some caveats:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1146 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Each ZFS pool will host only one filesystem. After install is finished, more filesystems can be created on this pool by using the <quote>zfs create</quote> command." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1151 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Each ZFS pool will be composed of exactly one partition. After install is finished, a single-device ZFS pool can be converted into a multi-device pool by using the <quote>zpool add</quote> command, or into a mirrored pool by using the <quote>zpool attach</quote> command. However, you shouldn't do this on the pool that hosts root filesystem, as it would prevent GRUB from booting your system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1159 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Compression is not currently supported. After the install is finished, compression can be enabled by setting the <quote>compression</quote> property via the <quote>zfs set</quote> command. However, if a compression algorithm other than the default (lzjb) is used on the pool that hosts your root filesystem, this may prevent GRUB from booting your system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1168 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis>reiserfs</emphasis> (optional; not available on all architectures)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1170 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Support for the Reiser file system is no longer available by default. When the installer is running at medium or low debconf priority it can be enabled by selecting the <classname>partman-reiserfs</classname> component. Only version 3 of the file system is supported." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: emphasis +#: using-d-i.xml:1177 +#, no-c-format +msgid "jffs2" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1178 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Used on some systems to read flash memory. It is not possible to create new jffs2 partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: emphasis +#: using-d-i.xml:1183 +#, no-c-format +msgid "qnx4" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1184 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Existing partitions will be recognized and it is possible to assign mount points for them. It is not possible to create new qnx4 partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1188 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis>FAT16</emphasis>, <emphasis>FAT32</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1191 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<emphasis>NTFS</emphasis> (read-only)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1193 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Existing NTFS partitions can be resized and it is possible to assign mount points for them. It is not possible to create new NTFS partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:1203 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Guided Partitioning" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1204 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you choose guided partitioning, you may have three options: to create partitions directly on the hard disk (classic method), or to create them using Logical Volume Management (LVM), or to create them using encrypted LVM<footnote> <para> The installer will encrypt the LVM volume group using a 256 bit AES key and makes use of the kernel's <quote>dm-crypt</quote> support. </para> </footnote>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1219 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The option to use (encrypted) LVM may not be available on all architectures." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1224 +#, no-c-format +msgid "When using LVM or encrypted LVM, the installer will create most partitions inside one big partition; the advantage of this method is that partitions inside this big partition can be resized relatively easily later. In the case of encrypted LVM the big partition will not be readable without knowing a special key phrase, thus providing extra security of your (personal) data." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1233 +#, no-c-format +msgid "When using encrypted LVM, the installer will also automatically erase the disk by writing random data to it. This further improves security (as it makes it impossible to tell which parts of the disk are in use and also makes sure that any traces of previous installations are erased), but may take some time depending on the size of your disk." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1242 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you choose guided partitioning using LVM or encrypted LVM, some changes in the partition table will need to be written to the selected disk while LVM is being set up. These changes effectively erase all data that is currently on the selected hard disk and you will not be able to undo them later. However, the installer will ask you to confirm these changes before they are written to disk." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1252 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you choose guided partitioning<phrase arch=\"linux-any\"> (either classic or using (encrypted) LVM)</phrase> for a whole disk, you will first be asked to select the disk you want to use. Check that all your disks are listed and, if you have several disks, make sure you select the correct one. The order they are listed in may differ from what you are used to. The size of the disks may help to identify them." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1261 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Any data on the disk you select will eventually be lost, but you will always be asked to confirm any changes before they are written to the disk. <phrase arch=\"linux-any\"> If you have selected the classic method of partitioning, you will be able to undo any changes right until the end; when using (encrypted) LVM this is not possible. </phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1271 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Next, you will be able to choose from the schemes listed in the table below. All schemes have their pros and cons, some of which are discussed in <xref linkend=\"partitioning\"/>. If you are unsure, choose the first one. Bear in mind that guided partitioning needs a certain minimal amount of free space to operate with. If you don't give it at least about 1GB of space (depends on chosen scheme), guided partitioning will fail." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1287 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Partitioning scheme" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1288 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Minimum space" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1289 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Created partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1295 +#, no-c-format +msgid "All files in one partition" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1296 +#, no-c-format +msgid "600MB" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1297 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>/</filename>, swap" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1299 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Separate /home partition" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1300 +#, no-c-format +msgid "500MB" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1301 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>/</filename>, <filename>/home</filename>, swap" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1305 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Separate /home, /usr, /var and /tmp partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1306 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>1GB</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1307 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<filename>/</filename>, <filename>/home</filename>, <filename>/usr</filename>, <filename>/var</filename>, <filename>/tmp</filename>, swap" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1316 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you choose guided partitioning using (encrypted) LVM, the installer will also create a separate <filename>/boot</filename> partition. The other partitions, including the swap partition, will be created inside the LVM partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1322 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you choose guided partitioning for your IA-64 system, there will be an additional partition, formatted as a FAT16 bootable filesystem, for the EFI boot loader. There is also an additional menu item in the formatting menu to manually set up a partition as an EFI boot partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1330 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After selecting a scheme, the next screen will show your new partition table, including information on whether and how partitions will be formatted and where they will be mounted." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1336 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "The list of partitions might look like this: <informalexample><screen>\n" + " IDE1 master (hda) - 6.4 GB WDC AC36400L\n" + " #1 primary 16.4 MB B f ext2 /boot\n" + " #2 primary 551.0 MB swap swap\n" + " #3 primary 5.8 GB ntfs\n" + " pri/log 8.2 MB FREE SPACE\n" + "\n" + " IDE1 slave (hdb) - 80.0 GB ST380021A\n" + " #1 primary 15.9 MB ext3\n" + " #2 primary 996.0 MB fat16\n" + " #3 primary 3.9 GB xfs /home\n" + " #5 logical 6.0 GB f ext3 /\n" + " #6 logical 1.0 GB f ext3 /var\n" + " #7 logical 498.8 MB ext3\n" + " #8 logical 551.5 MB swap swap\n" + " #9 logical 65.8 GB ext2\n" + "</screen></informalexample> This example shows two IDE harddrives divided into several partitions; the first disk has some free space. Each partition line consists of the partition number, its type, size, optional flags, file system, and mountpoint (if any). Note: this particular setup cannot be created using guided partitioning but it does show possible variation that can be achieved using manual partitioning." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1349 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This concludes the guided partitioning. If you are satisfied with the generated partition table, you can choose <guimenuitem>Finish partitioning and write changes to disk</guimenuitem> from the menu to implement the new partition table (as described at the end of this section). If you are not happy, you can choose to <guimenuitem>Undo changes to partitions</guimenuitem> and run guided partitioning again, or modify the proposed changes as described below for manual partitioning." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:1363 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Manual Partitioning" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1364 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A similar screen to the one shown just above will be displayed if you choose manual partitioning except that your existing partition table will be shown and without the mount points. How to manually set up your partition table and the usage of partitions by your new &debian; system will be covered in the remainder of this section." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1372 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you select a pristine disk which has neither partitions nor free space on it, you will be asked if a new partition table should be created (this is needed so you can create new partitions). After this, a new line entitled <quote>FREE SPACE</quote> should appear in the table under the selected disk." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1380 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you select some free space, you will have the opportunity to create a new partition. You will have to answer a quick series of questions about its size, type (primary or logical), and location (beginning or end of the free space). After this, you will be presented with a detailed overview of your new partition. The main setting is <guimenuitem>Use as:</guimenuitem>, which determines if the partition will have a file system on it, or be used for swap,<phrase arch=\"linux-any\"> software RAID, LVM, an encrypted file system,</phrase> or not be used at all. Other settings include mountpoint, mount options, and bootable flag; which settings are shown depends on how the partition is to be used. If you don't like the preselected defaults, feel free to change them to your liking. E.g. by selecting the option <guimenuitem>Use as:</guimenuitem>, you can choose a different filesystem for this partition, including options to use the partition for swap,<phrase arch=\"linux-any\"> software RAID, LVM,</phrase> or not use it at all. Another nice feature is the ability to copy data from an existing partition onto this one. When you are satisfied with your new partition, select <guimenuitem>Done setting up the partition</guimenuitem> and you will return to <command>partman</command>'s main screen." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1402 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you decide you want to change something about your partition, simply select the partition, which will bring you to the partition configuration menu. This is the same screen as is used when creating a new partition, so you can change the same settings. One thing that may not be very obvious at a first glance is that you can resize the partition by selecting the item displaying the size of the partition. Filesystems known to work are at least fat16, fat32, ext2, ext3 and swap. This menu also allows you to delete a partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1413 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Be sure to create at least two partitions: one for the <emphasis>root</emphasis> filesystem (which must be mounted as <filename>/</filename>) and one for <emphasis>swap</emphasis>. If you forget to mount the root filesystem, <command>partman</command> won't let you continue until you correct this issue." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1421 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you forget to select and format an EFI boot partition, <command>partman</command> will detect this and will not let you continue until you allocate one." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1427 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Capabilities of <command>partman</command> can be extended with installer modules, but are dependent on your system's architecture. So if you can't see all promised goodies, check if you have loaded all required modules (e.g. <filename>partman-ext3</filename>, <filename>partman-xfs</filename>, or <filename>partman-lvm</filename>)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1435 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After you are satisfied with partitioning, select <guimenuitem>Finish partitioning and write changes to disk</guimenuitem> from the partitioning menu. You will be presented with a summary of changes made to the disks and asked to confirm that the filesystems should be created as requested." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:1463 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configuring Multidisk Devices (Software RAID)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1464 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you have more than one harddrive<footnote><para> To be honest, you can construct an MD device even from partitions residing on single physical drive, but that won't give any benefits. </para></footnote> in your computer, you can use <command>mdcfg</command> to set up your drives for increased performance and/or better reliability of your data. The result is called <firstterm>Multidisk Device</firstterm> (or after its most famous variant <firstterm>software RAID</firstterm>)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1477 +#, no-c-format +msgid "MD is basically a bunch of partitions located on different disks and combined together to form a <emphasis>logical</emphasis> device. This device can then be used like an ordinary partition (i.e. in <command>partman</command> you can format it, assign a mountpoint, etc.)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1485 +#, no-c-format +msgid "What benefits this brings depends on the type of MD device you are creating. Currently supported are: <variablelist> <varlistentry> <term>RAID0</term><listitem><para> Is mainly aimed at performance. RAID0 splits all incoming data into <firstterm>stripes</firstterm> and distributes them equally over each disk in the array. This can increase the speed of read/write operations, but when one of the disks fails, you will lose <emphasis>everything</emphasis> (part of the information is still on the healthy disk(s), the other part <emphasis>was</emphasis> on the failed disk). </para><para> The typical use for RAID0 is a partition for video editing. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>RAID1</term><listitem><para> Is suitable for setups where reliability is the first concern. It consists of several (usually two) equally-sized partitions where every partition contains exactly the same data. This essentially means three things. First, if one of your disks fails, you still have the data mirrored on the remaining disks. Second, you can use only a fraction of the available capacity (more precisely, it is the size of the smallest partition in the RAID). Third, file-reads are load-balanced among the disks, which can improve performance on a server, such as a file server, that tends to be loaded with more disk reads than writes. </para><para> Optionally you can have a spare disk in the array which will take the place of the failed disk in the case of failure. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>RAID5</term><listitem><para> Is a good compromise between speed, reliability and data redundancy. RAID5 splits all incoming data into stripes and distributes them equally on all but one disk (similar to RAID0). Unlike RAID0, RAID5 also computes <firstterm>parity</firstterm> information, which gets written on the remaining disk. The parity disk is not static (that would be called RAID4), but is changing periodically, so the parity information is distributed equally on all disks. When one of the disks fails, the missing part of information can be computed from remaining data and its parity. RAID5 must consist of at least three active partitions. Optionally you can have a spare disk in the array which will take the place of the failed disk in the case of failure. </para><para> As you can see, RAID5 has a similar degree of reliability to RAID1 while achieving less redundancy. On the other hand, it might be a bit slower on write operations than RAID0 due to computation of parity information. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>RAID6</term><listitem><para> Is similar to RAID5 except that it uses two parity devices instead of one. </para><para> A RAID6 array can survive up to two disk failures. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>RAID10</term><listitem><para> RAID10 combines striping (as in RAID0) and mirroring (as in RAID1). It creates <replaceable>n</replaceable> copies of incoming data and distributes them across the partitions so that none of the copies of the same data are on the same device. The default value of <replaceable>n</replaceable> is 2, but it can be set to something else in expert mode. The number of partitions used must be at least <replaceable>n</replaceable>. RAID10 has different layouts for distributing the copies. The default is near copies. Near copies have all of the copies at about the same offset on all of the disks. Far copies have the copies at different offsets on the disks. Offset copies copy the stripe, not the individual copies. </para><para> RAID10 can be used to achieve reliability and redundancy without the drawback of having to calculate parity. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> </variablelist> To sum it up:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1599 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Type" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1600 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Minimum Devices" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1601 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Spare Device" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1602 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Survives disk failure?" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1603 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Available Space" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1609 +#, no-c-format +msgid "RAID0" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1610 using-d-i.xml:1618 using-d-i.xml:1648 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>2</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1611 using-d-i.xml:1612 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>no</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1613 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Size of the smallest partition multiplied by number of devices in RAID" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1617 +#, no-c-format +msgid "RAID1" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1619 using-d-i.xml:1627 using-d-i.xml:1638 using-d-i.xml:1649 +#, no-c-format +msgid "optional" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1620 using-d-i.xml:1628 using-d-i.xml:1639 using-d-i.xml:1650 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>yes</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1621 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Size of the smallest partition in RAID" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1625 +#, no-c-format +msgid "RAID5" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1626 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>3</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1629 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Size of the smallest partition multiplied by (number of devices in RAID minus one)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1636 +#, no-c-format +msgid "RAID6" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1637 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<entry>4</entry>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1640 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Size of the smallest partition multiplied by (number of devices in RAID minus two)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1647 +#, no-c-format +msgid "RAID10" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: entry +#: using-d-i.xml:1651 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Total of all partitions divided by the number of chunk copies (defaults to two)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1658 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you want to know more about Software RAID, have a look at <ulink url=\"&url-software-raid-howto;\">Software RAID HOWTO</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1663 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To create an MD device, you need to have the desired partitions it should consist of marked for use in a RAID. (This is done in <command>partman</command> in the <guimenu>Partition settings</guimenu> menu where you should select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Use as:</guimenu> <guimenuitem>physical volume for RAID</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>.)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1672 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Make sure that the system can be booted with the partitioning scheme you are planning. In general it will be necessary to create a separate file system for <filename>/boot</filename> when using RAID for the root (<filename>/</filename>) file system. Most boot loaders <phrase arch=\"x86\">(including lilo and grub)</phrase> do support mirrored (not striped!) RAID1, so using for example RAID5 for <filename>/</filename> and RAID1 for <filename>/boot</filename> can be an option." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1684 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Support for MD is a relatively new addition to the installer. You may experience problems for some RAID levels and in combination with some bootloaders if you try to use MD for the root (<filename>/</filename>) file system. For experienced users, it may be possible to work around some of these problems by executing some configuration or installation steps manually from a shell." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1693 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Next, you should choose <guimenuitem>Configure software RAID</guimenuitem> from the main <command>partman</command> menu. (The menu will only appear after you mark at least one partition for use as <guimenuitem>physical volume for RAID</guimenuitem>.) On the first screen of <command>mdcfg</command> simply select <guimenuitem>Create MD device</guimenuitem>. You will be presented with a list of supported types of MD devices, from which you should choose one (e.g. RAID1). What follows depends on the type of MD you selected." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1706 +#, no-c-format +msgid "RAID0 is simple — you will be issued with the list of available RAID partitions and your only task is to select the partitions which will form the MD." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1713 +#, no-c-format +msgid "RAID1 is a bit more tricky. First, you will be asked to enter the number of active devices and the number of spare devices which will form the MD. Next, you need to select from the list of available RAID partitions those that will be active and then those that will be spare. The count of selected partitions must be equal to the number provided earlier. Don't worry. If you make a mistake and select a different number of partitions, &d-i; won't let you continue until you correct the issue." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1725 +#, no-c-format +msgid "RAID5 has a setup procedure similar to RAID1 with the exception that you need to use at least <emphasis>three</emphasis> active partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1731 +#, no-c-format +msgid "RAID6 also has a setup procedure similar to RAID1 except that at least <emphasis>four</emphasis> active partitions are required." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1737 +#, no-c-format +msgid "RAID10 again has a setup procedure similar to RAID1 except in expert mode. In expert mode, &d-i; will ask you for the layout. The layout has two parts. The first part is the layout type. It is either <literal>n</literal> (for near copies), <literal>f</literal> (for far copies), or <literal>o</literal> (for offset copies). The second part is the number of copies to make of the data. There must be at least that many active devices so that all of the copies can be distributed onto different disks." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1751 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is perfectly possible to have several types of MD at once. For example, if you have three 200 GB hard drives dedicated to MD, each containing two 100 GB partitions, you can combine the first partitions on all three disks into the RAID0 (fast 300 GB video editing partition) and use the other three partitions (2 active and 1 spare) for RAID1 (quite reliable 100 GB partition for <filename>/home</filename>)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1760 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After you set up MD devices to your liking, you can <guimenuitem>Finish</guimenuitem> <command>mdcfg</command> to return back to the <command>partman</command> to create filesystems on your new MD devices and assign them the usual attributes like mountpoints." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:1775 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configuring the Logical Volume Manager (LVM)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1776 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are working with computers at the level of system administrator or <quote>advanced</quote> user, you have surely seen the situation where some disk partition (usually the most important one) was short on space, while some other partition was grossly underused and you had to manage this situation by moving stuff around, symlinking, etc." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1784 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To avoid the described situation you can use Logical Volume Manager (LVM). Simply said, with LVM you can combine your partitions (<firstterm>physical volumes</firstterm> in LVM lingo) to form a virtual disk (so called <firstterm>volume group</firstterm>), which can then be divided into virtual partitions (<firstterm>logical volumes</firstterm>). The point is that logical volumes (and of course underlying volume groups) can span across several physical disks." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1794 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Now when you realize you need more space for your old 160GB <filename>/home</filename> partition, you can simply add a new 300GB disk to the computer, join it with your existing volume group and then resize the logical volume which holds your <filename>/home</filename> filesystem and voila — your users have some room again on their renewed 460GB partition. This example is of course a bit oversimplified. If you haven't read it yet, you should consult the <ulink url=\"&url-lvm-howto;\">LVM HOWTO</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1805 +#, no-c-format +msgid "LVM setup in &d-i; is quite simple and completely supported inside <command>partman</command>. First, you have to mark the partition(s) to be used as physical volumes for LVM. This is done in the <guimenu>Partition settings</guimenu> menu where you should select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Use as:</guimenu> <guimenuitem>physical volume for LVM</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1814 +#, no-c-format +msgid "When you return to the main <command>partman</command> screen, you will see a new option <guimenuitem>Configure the Logical Volume Manager</guimenuitem>. When you select that, you will first be asked to confirm pending changes to the partition table (if any) and after that the LVM configuration menu will be shown. Above the menu a summary of the LVM configuration is shown. The menu itself is context sensitive and only shows valid actions. The possible actions are:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1825 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<guimenuitem>Display configuration details</guimenuitem>: shows LVM device structure, names and sizes of logical volumes and more" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: guimenuitem +#: using-d-i.xml:1830 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Create volume group" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: guimenuitem +#: using-d-i.xml:1833 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Create logical volume" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: guimenuitem +#: using-d-i.xml:1836 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Delete volume group" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: guimenuitem +#: using-d-i.xml:1839 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Delete logical volume" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: guimenuitem +#: using-d-i.xml:1842 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Extend volume group" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: guimenuitem +#: using-d-i.xml:1845 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Reduce volume group" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1847 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<guimenuitem>Finish</guimenuitem>: return to the main <command>partman</command> screen" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1853 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Use the options in that menu to first create a volume group and then create your logical volumes inside it." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1858 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After you return to the main <command>partman</command> screen, any created logical volumes will be displayed in the same way as ordinary partitions (and you should treat them as such)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:1872 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configuring Encrypted Volumes" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1873 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&d-i; allows you to set up encrypted partitions. Every file you write to such a partition is immediately saved to the device in encrypted form. Access to the encrypted data is granted only after entering the <firstterm>passphrase</firstterm> used when the encrypted partition was originally created. This feature is useful to protect sensitive data in case your laptop or hard drive gets stolen. The thief might get physical access to the hard drive, but without knowing the right passphrase, the data on the hard drive will look like random characters." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1885 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The two most important partitions to encrypt are: the home partition, where your private data resides, and the swap partition, where sensitive data might be stored temporarily during operation. Of course, nothing prevents you from encrypting any other partitions that might be of interest. For example <filename>/var</filename> where database servers, mail servers or print servers store their data, or <filename>/tmp</filename> which is used by various programs to store potentially interesting temporary files. Some people may even want to encrypt their whole system. The only exception is the <filename>/boot</filename> partition which must remain unencrypted, because currently there is no way to load the kernel from an encrypted partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1900 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Please note that the performance of encrypted partitions will be less than that of unencrypted ones because the data needs to be decrypted or encrypted for every read or write. The performance impact depends on your CPU speed, chosen cipher and a key length." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1907 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To use encryption, you have to create a new partition by selecting some free space in the main partitioning menu. Another option is to choose an existing partition (e.g. a regular partition, an LVM logical volume or a RAID volume). In the <guimenu>Partition settings</guimenu> menu, you need to select <guimenuitem>physical volume for encryption</guimenuitem> at the <menuchoice> <guimenu>Use as:</guimenu> </menuchoice> option. The menu will then change to include several cryptographic options for the partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1918 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&d-i; supports several encryption methods. The default method is <firstterm>dm-crypt</firstterm> (included in newer Linux kernels, able to host LVM physical volumes), the other is <firstterm>loop-AES</firstterm> (older, maintained separately from the Linux kernel tree). Unless you have compelling reasons to do otherwise, it is recommended to use the default." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1930 +#, no-c-format +msgid "First, let's have a look at the options available when you select <userinput>Device-mapper (dm-crypt)</userinput> as the encryption method. As always: when in doubt, use the defaults, because they have been carefully chosen with security in mind." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:1940 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Encryption: <userinput>aes</userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1942 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This option lets you select the encryption algorithm (<firstterm>cipher</firstterm>) which will be used to encrypt the data on the partition. &d-i; currently supports the following block ciphers: <firstterm>aes</firstterm>, <firstterm>blowfish</firstterm>, <firstterm>serpent</firstterm>, and <firstterm>twofish</firstterm>. It is beyond the scope of this document to discuss the qualities of these different algorithms, however, it might help your decision to know that in 2000, <emphasis>AES</emphasis> was chosen by the American National Institute of Standards and Technology as the standard encryption algorithm for protecting sensitive information in the 21st century." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:1960 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Key size: <userinput>256</userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1962 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Here you can specify the length of the encryption key. With a larger key size, the strength of the encryption is generally improved. On the other hand, increasing the length of the key usually has a negative impact on performance. Available key sizes vary depending on the cipher." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:1974 +#, no-c-format +msgid "IV algorithm: <userinput>cbc-essiv:sha256</userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1976 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The <firstterm>Initialization Vector</firstterm> or <firstterm>IV</firstterm> algorithm is used in cryptography to ensure that applying the cipher on the same <firstterm>clear text</firstterm> data with the same key always produces a unique <firstterm>cipher text</firstterm>. The idea is to prevent the attacker from deducing information from repeated patterns in the encrypted data." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:1986 +#, no-c-format +msgid "From the provided alternatives, the default <userinput>cbc-essiv:sha256</userinput> is currently the least vulnerable to known attacks. Use the other alternatives only when you need to ensure compatibility with some previously installed system that is not able to use newer algorithms." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:1998 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Encryption key: <userinput>Passphrase</userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2000 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Here you can choose the type of the encryption key for this partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:2006 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Passphrase" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2007 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The encryption key will be computed<footnote> <para> Using a passphrase as the key currently means that the partition will be set up using <ulink url=\"&url-luks;\">LUKS</ulink>. </para></footnote> on the basis of a passphrase which you will be able to enter later in the process." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:2022 using-d-i.xml:2115 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Random key" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2023 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A new encryption key will be generated from random data each time you try to bring up the encrypted partition. In other words: on every shutdown the content of the partition will be lost as the key is deleted from memory. (Of course, you could try to guess the key with a brute force attack, but unless there is an unknown weakness in the cipher algorithm, it is not achievable in our lifetime.)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2032 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Random keys are useful for swap partitions because you do not need to bother yourself with remembering the passphrase or wiping sensitive information from the swap partition before shutting down your computer. However, it also means that you will <emphasis>not</emphasis> be able to use the <quote>suspend-to-disk</quote> functionality offered by newer Linux kernels as it will be impossible (during a subsequent boot) to recover the suspended data written to the swap partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:2051 using-d-i.xml:2128 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Erase data: <userinput>yes</userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2053 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Determines whether the content of this partition should be overwritten with random data before setting up the encryption. This is recommended because it might otherwise be possible for an attacker to discern which parts of the partition are in use and which are not. In addition, this will make it harder to recover any leftover data from previous installations<footnote><para> It is believed that the guys from three-letter agencies can restore the data even after several rewrites of the magnetooptical media, though. </para></footnote>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2073 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Encryption method:</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Loopback (loop-AES)</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>, the menu changes to provide the following options:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:2082 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Encryption: <userinput>AES256</userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2084 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For loop-AES, unlike dm-crypt, the options for cipher and key size are combined, so you can select both at the same time. Please see the above sections on ciphers and key sizes for further information." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:2094 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Encryption key: <userinput>Keyfile (GnuPG)</userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2096 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Here you can select the type of the encryption key for this partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:2102 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Keyfile (GnuPG)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2103 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The encryption key will be generated from random data during the installation. Moreover this key will be encrypted with <application>GnuPG</application>, so to use it, you will need to enter the proper passphrase (you will be asked to provide one later in the process)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2116 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Please see the section on random keys above." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2130 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Please see the the section on erasing data above." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2139 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After you have selected the desired parameters for your encrypted partitions, return back to the main partitioning menu. There should now be a new menu item called <guimenu>Configure encrypted volumes</guimenu>. After you select it, you will be asked to confirm the deletion of data on partitions marked to be erased and possibly other actions such as writing a new partition table. For large partitions this might take some time." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2149 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Next you will be asked to enter a passphrase for partitions configured to use one. Good passphrases should be longer than 8 characters, should be a mixture of letters, numbers and other characters and should not contain common dictionary words or information easily associable with you (such as birthdates, hobbies, pet names, names of family members or relatives, etc.)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2158 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Before you input any passphrases, you should have made sure that your keyboard is configured correctly and generates the expected characters. If you are unsure, you can switch to the second virtual console and type some text at the prompt. This ensures that you won't be surprised later, e.g. by trying to input a passphrase using a qwerty keyboard layout when you used an azerty layout during the installation. This situation can have several causes. Maybe you switched to another keyboard layout during the installation, or the selected keyboard layout might not have been set up yet when entering the passphrase for the root file system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2171 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you selected to use methods other than a passphrase to create encryption keys, they will be generated now. Because the kernel may not have gathered a sufficient amount of entropy at this early stage of the installation, the process may take a long time. You can help speed up the process by generating entropy: e.g. by pressing random keys, or by switching to the shell on the second virtual console and generating some network and disk traffic (downloading some files, feeding big files into <filename>/dev/null</filename>, etc.). This will be repeated for each partition to be encrypted." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2187 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "After returning to the main partitioning menu, you will see all encrypted volumes as additional partitions which can be configured in the same way as ordinary partitions. The following example shows two different volumes. The first one is encrypted via dm-crypt, the second one via loop-AES. <informalexample><screen>\n" + "Encrypted volume (<replaceable>sda2_crypt</replaceable>) - 115.1 GB Linux device-mapper\n" + " #1 115.1 GB F ext3\n" + "\n" + "Loopback (<replaceable>loop0</replaceable>) - 515.2 MB AES256 keyfile\n" + " #1 515.2 MB F ext3\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Now is the time to assign mount points to the volumes and optionally change the file system types if the defaults do not suit you." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2200 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Pay attention to the identifiers in parentheses (<replaceable>sda2_crypt</replaceable> and <replaceable>loop0</replaceable> in this case) and the mount points you assigned to each encrypted volume. You will need this information later when booting the new system. The differences between the ordinary boot process and the boot process with encryption involved will be covered later in <xref linkend=\"mount-encrypted-volumes\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2210 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Once you are satisfied with the partitioning scheme, continue with the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2221 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installing the Base System" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2222 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Although this stage is the least problematic, it consumes a significant fraction of the install because it downloads, verifies and unpacks the whole base system. If you have a slow computer or network connection, this could take some time." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2235 +#, no-c-format +msgid "During installation of the base system, package unpacking and setup messages are redirected to <userinput>tty4</userinput>. You can access this terminal by pressing <keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap><keycap>F4</keycap></keycombo>; get back to the main installer process with <keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap><keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2244 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The unpack/setup messages generated during this phase are also saved in <filename>/var/log/syslog</filename>. You can check them there if the installation is performed over a serial console." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2250 +#, no-c-format +msgid "As part of the installation, a &arch-kernel; kernel will be installed. At the default priority, the installer will choose one for you that best matches your hardware. In lower priority modes, you will be able to choose from a list of available kernels." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2257 +#, no-c-format +msgid "When packages are installed using the package management system, it will by default also install packages that are recommended by those packages. Recommended packages are not strictly required for the core functionality of the selected software, but they do enhance that software and should, in the view of the package maintainers, normally be installed together with that software." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2267 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For technical reasons packages installed during the installation of the base system are installed without their <quote>Recommends</quote>. The rule described above only takes effect after this point in the installation process." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2279 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installing Additional Software" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2280 +#, no-c-format +msgid "At this point you have a usable but limited system. Most users will want to install additional software on the system to tune it to their needs, and the installer allows you do so. This step can take even longer than installing the base system if you have a slow computer or network connection." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2295 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Configuring apt" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2297 +#, no-c-format +msgid "One of the tools used to install packages on a &debian-gnu; system is a program called <command>apt-get</command>, from the <classname>apt</classname> package<footnote> <para> Note that the program which actually installs the packages is called <command>dpkg</command>. However, this program is more of a low-level tool. <command>apt-get</command> is a higher-level tool, which will invoke <command>dpkg</command> as appropriate. It knows how to retrieve packages from your CD, the network, or wherever. It is also able to automatically install other packages which are required to make the package you're trying to install work correctly. </para> </footnote>. Other front-ends for package management, like <command>aptitude</command> and <command>synaptic</command>, are also in use. These front-ends are recommended for new users, since they integrate some additional features (package searching and status checks) in a nice user interface. In fact, <command>aptitude</command> is now the recommended utility for package management." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2321 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<command>apt</command> must be configured so that it knows from where to retrieve packages. The results of this configuration are written to the file <filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename>. You can examine and edit this file to your liking after the installation is complete." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2328 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are installing at default priority, the installer will largely take care of the configuration automatically, based on the installation method you are using and possibly using choices made earlier in the installation. In most cases the installer will automatically add a security mirror and, if you are installing the stable distribution, a mirror for the <quote>volatile</quote> update service." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2337 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are installing at a lower priority (e.g. in expert mode), you will be able to make more decisions yourself. You can choose whether or not to use the security and/or volatile update services, and you can choose to add packages from the <quote>contrib</quote> and <quote>non-free</quote> sections of the archive." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2348 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installing from more than one CD or DVD" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2350 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are installing from a CD or a DVD that is part of a larger set, the installer will ask if you want to scan additional CDs or DVDs. If you have additional CDs or DVDs available, you probably want to do this so the installer can use the packages included on them." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2357 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you do not have any additional CDs or DVDs, that is no problem: using them is not required. If you also do not use a network mirror (as explained in the next section), it can mean that not all packages belonging to the tasks you select in the next step of the installation can be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2365 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Packages are included on CDs (and DVDs) in the order of their popularity. This means that for most uses only the first CDs in a set are needed and that only very few people actually use any of the packages included on the last CDs in a set." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2372 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It also means that buying or downloading and burning a full CD set is just a waste of money as you'll never use most of them. In most cases you are better off getting only the first 3 to 8 CDs and installing any additional packages you may need from the Internet by using a mirror. The same goes for DVD sets: the first DVD, or maybe the first two DVDs will cover most needs." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2381 +#, no-c-format +msgid "A good rule of thumb is that for a regular desktop installation (using the GNOME desktop environment) only the first three CDs are needed. For the alternative desktop environments (KDE or Xfce), additional CDs are needed. The first DVD easily covers all three desktop environments." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2389 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you do scan multiple CDs or DVDs, the installer will prompt you to exchange them when it needs packages from another CD/DVD than the one currently in the drive. Note that only CDs or DVDs that belong to the same set should be scanned. The order in which they are scanned does not really matter, but scanning them in ascending order will reduce the chance of mistakes." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2402 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Using a network mirror" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2404 +#, no-c-format +msgid "One question that will be asked during most installs is whether or not to use a network mirror as a source for packages. In most cases the default answer should be fine, but there are some exceptions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2410 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are <emphasis>not</emphasis> installing from a full CD or DVD or using a full CD/DVD image, you really should use a network mirror as otherwise you will end up with only a very minimal system. However, if you have a limited Internet connection it is best <emphasis>not</emphasis> to select the <literal>desktop</literal> task in the next step of the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2419 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are installing from a single full CD or using a full CD image, using a network mirror is not required, but is still strongly recommended because a single CD contains only a fairly limited number of packages. If you have a limited Internet connection it may still be best to <emphasis>not</emphasis> select a network mirror here, but to finish the installation using only what's available on the CD and selectively install additional packages after the installation (i.e. after you have rebooted into the new system)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2430 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are installing from a DVD or using a DVD image, any packages needed during the installation should be present on the first DVD. The same is true if you have scanned multiple CDs as explained in the previous section. Use of a network mirror is optional." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2437 +#, no-c-format +msgid "One advantage of adding a network mirror is that updates that have occurred since the CD/DVD set was created and have been included in a point release, will become available for installation, thus extending the life of your CD/DVD set without compromising the security or stability of the installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2444 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In summary: selecting a network mirror is generally a good idea, except if you do not have a good Internet connection. If the current version of a package is available from CD/DVD, the installer will always use that. The amount of data that will be downloaded if you do select a mirror thus depends on" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2453 +#, no-c-format +msgid "the tasks you select in the next step of the installation," +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2458 +#, no-c-format +msgid "which packages are needed for those tasks," +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2463 +#, no-c-format +msgid "which of those packages are present on the CDs or DVDs you have scanned, and" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2468 +#, no-c-format +msgid "whether any updated versions of packages included on the CDs or DVDs are available from a mirror (either a regular package mirror, or a mirror for security or volatile updates)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2477 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that the last point means that, even if you choose not to use a network mirror, some packages may still be downloaded from the Internet if there is a security or volatile update available for them and those services have been configured." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2488 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Choosing a network mirror" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2489 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you have selected to use a network mirror during the installation (optional for CD/DVD installs, required for netboot images), you will be presented with a list of geographically nearby (and therefore hopefully fast) network mirrors, based upon your country selection earlier in the installation process. Choosing the offered default is usually fine." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2497 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If your computer is on an IPv6-only network (which is probably not the case for the vast majority of users), using the default mirror for your country might not work. All the mirrors in the list are reachable via IPv4, but only some of them can be used via IPv6. As connectivity of individual mirrors can change over time, this information is not available in the installer. If there is no IPv6 connectivity for the default mirror for your country, you can either try some of the other mirrors offered to you or choose the <quote>enter information manually</quote> option. You can then specify <quote>ftp.ipv6.debian.org</quote> as the mirror name, which is an alias for a mirror available via IPv6, although it will probably not be the fastest possible one." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2511 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Another option when choosing to specify the mirror manually is to use <quote>http.debian.net</quote> as your mirror. <quote>http.debian.net</quote> is not a physical mirror but a mirror redirection service, i.e. it automatically refers your system to a real mirror near you in terms of network topology. It takes into account by which protocol you connect to it, i.e. if you use IPv6, it will refer you to an IPv6-capable mirror near you." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2530 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Selecting and Installing Software" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2532 +#, no-c-format +msgid "During the installation process, you are given the opportunity to select additional software to install. Rather than picking individual software packages from the &num-of-distrib-pkgs; available packages, this stage of the installation process focuses on selecting and installing predefined collections of software to quickly set up your computer to perform various tasks." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2541 +#, no-c-format +msgid "So, you have the ability to choose <emphasis>tasks</emphasis> first, and then add on more individual packages later. These tasks loosely represent a number of different jobs or things you want to do with your computer, such as <quote>Desktop environment</quote>, <quote>Web server</quote>, or <quote>Print server</quote><footnote> <para> You should know that to present this list, the installer is merely invoking the <command>tasksel</command> program. It can be run at any time after installation to install more packages (or remove them), or you can use a more fine-grained tool such as <command>aptitude</command>. If you are looking for a specific single package, after installation is complete, simply run <userinput>aptitude install <replaceable>package</replaceable></userinput>, where <replaceable>package</replaceable> is the name of the package you are looking for. </para> </footnote>. <xref linkend=\"tasksel-size-list\"/> lists the space requirements for the available tasks." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2568 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Some tasks may be pre-selected based on the characteristics of the computer you are installing. If you disagree with these selections you can deselect them. You can even opt to install no tasks at all at this point." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2575 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In the standard user interface of the installer, you can use the space bar to toggle selection of a task." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2581 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Unless you are using the special KDE or Xfce/LXDE CDs, the <quote>Desktop environment</quote> task will install the GNOME desktop environment." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2586 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is not possible to interactively select a different desktop during the installation. However, it <emphasis>is</emphasis> possible to get &d-i; to install a KDE desktop environment instead of GNOME by using preseeding (see <xref linkend=\"preseed-pkgsel\"/>) or by adding the parameter <literal>desktop=kde</literal> at the boot prompt when starting the installer. Alternatively the more lightweight Xfce and LXDE desktop environments can be selected by using <literal>desktop=xfce</literal> or <literal>desktop=lxde</literal>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2597 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Some CD images (netinst and DVD) also allow selection of the desired desktop environment from the graphical boot menu. Select the <quote>Advanced options</quote> option in the main menu and look for <quote>Alternative desktop environments</quote>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2604 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that this will only work if the packages needed for the desired desktop environment are actually available. If you are installing using a single full CD image, they will need to be downloaded from a mirror as most needed packages are only included on later CDs; installing KDE, Xfce or LXDE this way should work fine if you are using a DVD image or any other installation method." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2614 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The various server tasks will install software roughly as follows. DNS server: <classname>bind9</classname>; File server: <classname>samba</classname>, <classname>nfs</classname>; Mail server: <classname>exim4</classname>, <classname>spamassassin</classname>, <classname>uw-imap</classname>; Print server: <classname>cups</classname>; SQL database: <classname>postgresql</classname>; Web server: <classname>apache2</classname>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2625 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The <quote>Standard system</quote> task will install any package that has a priority <quote>standard</quote>. This includes a lot of common utilities that are normally available on any Linux or Unix system. You should leave this task selected unless you know what you are doing and want a really minimal system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2633 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If during language selection a default locale other than the <quote>C</quote> locale was selected, <command>tasksel</command> will check if any localization tasks are defined for that locale and will automatically try to install relevant localization packages. This includes for example packages containing word lists or special fonts for your language. If a desktop environment was selected, it will also install appropriate localization packages for that (if available)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2643 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Once you've selected your tasks, select &BTN-CONT;. At this point, <command>aptitude</command> will install the packages that are part of the selected tasks. If a particular program needs more information from the user, it will prompt you during this process." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2650 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You should be aware that especially the Desktop task is very large. Especially when installing from a normal CD-ROM in combination with a mirror for packages not on the CD-ROM, the installer may want to retrieve a lot of packages over the network. If you have a relatively slow Internet connection, this can take a long time. There is no option to cancel the installation of packages once it has started." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2659 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Even when packages are included on the CD-ROM, the installer may still retrieve them from the mirror if the version available on the mirror is more recent than the one included on the CD-ROM. If you are installing the stable distribution, this can happen after a point release (an update of the original stable release); if you are installing the testing distribution this will happen if you are using an older image." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2674 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Making Your System Bootable" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2676 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you are installing a diskless workstation, obviously, booting off the local disk isn't a meaningful option, and this step will be skipped. <phrase arch=\"sparc\">You may wish to set OpenBoot to boot from the network by default; see <xref linkend=\"boot-dev-select-sun\"/>.</phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2691 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Detecting other operating systems" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2693 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Before a boot loader is installed, the installer will attempt to probe for other operating systems which are installed on the machine. If it finds a supported operating system, you will be informed of this during the boot loader installation step, and the computer will be configured to boot this other operating system in addition to &debian;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2701 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that multiple operating systems booting on a single machine is still something of a black art. The automatic support for detecting and setting up boot loaders to boot other operating systems varies by architecture and even by subarchitecture. If it does not work you should consult your boot manager's documentation for more information." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2719 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<command>palo</command>-installer" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2720 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The bootloader on PA-RISC is <quote>palo</quote>. <command>PALO</command> is similar in configuration and usage to <command>LILO</command>, with a few exceptions. First of all, <command>PALO</command> allows you to boot any kernel image on your boot partition. This is because <command>PALO</command> can actually read Linux partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2729 +#, no-c-format +msgid "hppa FIXME ( need more info )" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2741 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Install the <command>Grub</command> Boot Loader on a Hard Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2743 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The main &architecture; boot loader is called <quote>grub</quote>. Grub is a flexible and robust boot loader and a good default choice for new users and old hands alike." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2749 +#, no-c-format +msgid "By default, grub will be installed into the Master Boot Record (MBR), where it will take over complete control of the boot process. If you prefer, you can install it elsewhere. See the grub manual for complete information." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2755 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you do not want to install grub, use the &BTN-GOBACK; button to get to the main menu, and from there select whatever bootloader you would like to use." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2768 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Install the <command>LILO</command> Boot Loader on a Hard Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2770 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The second &architecture; boot loader is called <quote>LILO</quote>. It is an old complex program which offers lots of functionality, including DOS, Windows, and OS/2 boot management. Please carefully read the instructions in the directory <filename>/usr/share/doc/lilo/</filename> if you have special needs; also see the <ulink url=\"&url-lilo-howto;\">LILO mini-HOWTO</ulink>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2780 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Currently the LILO installation will only create menu entries for other operating systems if these can be <firstterm>chainloaded</firstterm>. This means you may have to manually add a menu entry for operating systems like GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd after the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2788 +#, no-c-format +msgid "&d-i; offers you three choices on where to install the <command>LILO</command> boot loader:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:2795 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Master Boot Record (MBR)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2795 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This way the <command>LILO</command> will take complete control of the boot process." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:2802 +#, no-c-format +msgid "new &debian; partition" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2802 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Choose this if you want to use another boot manager. <command>LILO</command> will install itself at the beginning of the new &debian; partition and it will serve as a secondary boot loader." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: term +#: using-d-i.xml:2811 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Other choice" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2811 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Useful for advanced users who want to install <command>LILO</command> somewhere else. In this case you will be asked for desired location. You can use traditional device names such as <filename>/dev/hda</filename> or <filename>/dev/sda</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2821 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you can no longer boot into Windows 9x (or DOS) after this step, you'll need to use a Windows 9x (MS-DOS) boot disk and use the <userinput>fdisk /mbr</userinput> command to reinstall the MS-DOS master boot record — however, this means that you'll need to use some other way to get back into &debian;!" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2837 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Install the <command>ELILO</command> Boot Loader on a Hard Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2839 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The &architecture; boot loader is called <quote>elilo</quote>. It is modeled on the <quote>lilo</quote> boot loader for the x86 architecture and uses a similar configuration file. However, instead of writing an MBR or partition boot record to the disk, it copies the necessary files to a separate FAT formatted disk partition and modifies the <guimenuitem>EFI Boot Manager</guimenuitem> menu in the firmware to point to the files in the EFI partition. The <command>elilo</command> boot loader is really in two parts. The <filename>/usr/sbin/elilo</filename> command manages the partition and copies files into it. The <filename>elilo.efi</filename> program is copied into the EFI partition and then run by the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> to do the actual work of loading and starting the Linux kernel." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2855 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The <quote>elilo</quote> configuration and installation is done as the last step of installing the packages of the base installation. &d-i; will present you with a list of potential disk partitions that it has found suitable for an EFI partition. Select the partition you set up earlier in the installation, typically a partition on the same disk that contains your <emphasis>root</emphasis> filesystem." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2867 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Choose the correct partition!" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2869 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The criterion for selecting a partition is that it must be a FAT format filesystem with its <emphasis>boot</emphasis> flag set. &d-i; may show multiple choices depending on what it finds from scanning all of the disks of the system including EFI partitions of other system disks and EFI diagnostic partitions. Remember, <command>elilo</command> may format the partition during the installation, erasing any previous contents!" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2884 +#, no-c-format +msgid "EFI Partition Contents" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2886 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The EFI partition is a FAT filesystem format partition on one of the hard disks of the system, usually the same disk that contains the <emphasis>root</emphasis> filesystem. It is normally not mounted on a running system as it is only needed by the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> to load the system and the installer part of the <command>elilo</command> writes to the filesystem directly. The <command>/usr/sbin/elilo</command> utility writes the following files into the <filename>efi/debian</filename> directory of the EFI partition during the installation. Note that the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> would find these files using the path <filename>fs<replaceable>n</replaceable>:\\efi\\debian</filename>. There may be other files in this filesystem as well over time as the system is updated or re-configured." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: using-d-i.xml:2908 +#, no-c-format +msgid "elilo.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2909 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This is the configuration file read by the boot loader when it starts. It is a copy of the <filename>/etc/elilo.conf</filename> with the filenames re-written to refer to files in the EFI partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: using-d-i.xml:2918 +#, no-c-format +msgid "elilo.efi" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2919 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This is the boot loader program that the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> runs to boot the system. It is the program behind the <guimenuitem>&debian; GNU/Linux</guimenuitem> menu item of the <quote>EFI Boot Manager</quote> command menu." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: using-d-i.xml:2929 +#, no-c-format +msgid "initrd.img" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2930 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This is the initial root filesystem used to boot the kernel. It is a copy of the file referenced in the <filename>/etc/elilo.conf</filename>. In a standard &debian; installation it would be the file in <filename>/boot</filename> pointed to by the symbolic link <filename>/initrd.img</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: using-d-i.xml:2942 +#, no-c-format +msgid "readme.txt" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2943 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This is a small text file warning you that the contents of the directory are managed by the <command>elilo</command> and that any local changes would be lost at the next time <filename>/usr/sbin/elilo</filename> is run." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: filename +#: using-d-i.xml:2953 +#, no-c-format +msgid "vmlinuz" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2954 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This is the compressed kernel itself. It is a copy of the file referenced in the <filename>/etc/elilo.conf</filename>. In a standard &debian; installation it would be the file in <filename>/boot</filename> pointed to by the symbolic link <filename>/vmlinuz</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:2974 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<command>arcboot</command>-installer" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2975 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "The boot loader on SGI machines is <command>arcboot</command>. It has to be installed on the same hard disk as the kernel (this is done automatically by the installer). Arcboot supports different configurations which are set up in <filename>/etc/arcboot.conf</filename>. Each configuration has a unique name, the default setup as created by the installer is <quote>linux</quote>. After arcboot has been installed, the system can be booted from hard disk by setting some firmware environment variables entering <informalexample><screen>\n" + "<userinput> setenv SystemPartition scsi(<replaceable>scsi</replaceable>)disk(<replaceable>disk</replaceable>)rdisk(0)partition(0)</userinput>\n" + "<userinput> setenv OSLoadPartition scsi(<replaceable>scsi</replaceable>)disk(<replaceable>disk</replaceable>)rdisk(0)partition(<replaceable>partnr</replaceable>)</userinput>\n" + "<userinput> setenv OSLoader arcboot</userinput>\n" + "<userinput> setenv OSLoadFilename <replaceable>config</replaceable></userinput>\n" + "<userinput> setenv AutoLoad yes</userinput>\n" + "</screen></informalexample> on the firmware prompt, and then typing <command>boot</command>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: replaceable +#: using-d-i.xml:2994 +#, no-c-format +msgid "scsi" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:2995 +#, no-c-format +msgid "is the SCSI bus to be booted from, this is <userinput>0</userinput> for the onboard controllers" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: replaceable +#: using-d-i.xml:3003 +#, no-c-format +msgid "disk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3004 +#, no-c-format +msgid "is the SCSI ID of the hard disk on which <command>arcboot</command> is installed" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: replaceable +#: using-d-i.xml:3012 +#, no-c-format +msgid "partnr" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3013 +#, no-c-format +msgid "is the number of the partition on which <filename>/etc/arcboot.conf</filename> resides" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: replaceable +#: using-d-i.xml:3021 +#, no-c-format +msgid "config" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3022 +#, no-c-format +msgid "is the name of the configuration entry in <filename>/etc/arcboot.conf</filename>, which is <quote>linux</quote> by default." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3043 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Install <command>Yaboot</command> on a Hard Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3044 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Newer (mid 1998 and on) PowerMacs use <command>yaboot</command> as their boot loader. The installer will set up <command>yaboot</command> automatically, so all you need is a small 820k partition named <quote>bootstrap</quote> with type <emphasis>Apple_Bootstrap</emphasis> created back in the partitioning component. If this step completes successfully then your disk should now be bootable and OpenFirmware will be set to boot &debian-gnu;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3062 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Install <command>Quik</command> on a Hard Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3063 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The boot loader for OldWorld Power Macintosh machines is <command>quik</command>. You can also use it on CHRP. The installer will attempt to set up <command>quik</command> automatically. The setup has been known to work on 7200, 7300, and 7600 Powermacs, and on some Power Computing clones." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3079 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<command>zipl</command>-installer" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3080 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The boot loader on &arch-title; is <quote>zipl</quote>. <command>ZIPL</command> is similar in configuration and usage to <command>LILO</command>, with a few exceptions. Please take a look at <quote>LINUX for &arch-title; Device Drivers and Installation Commands</quote> from IBM's developerWorks web site if you want to know more about <command>ZIPL</command>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3097 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Install the <command>SILO</command> Boot Loader on a Hard Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3099 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The standard &architecture; boot loader is called <quote>silo</quote>. It is documented in <filename>/usr/share/doc/silo/</filename>. <command>SILO</command> is similar in configuration and usage to <command>LILO</command>, with a few exceptions. First of all, <command>SILO</command> allows you to boot any kernel image on your drive, even if it is not listed in <filename>/etc/silo.conf</filename>. This is because <command>SILO</command> can actually read Linux partitions. Also, <filename>/etc/silo.conf</filename> is read at boot time, so there is no need to rerun <command>silo</command> after installing a new kernel like you would with <command>LILO</command>. <command>SILO</command> can also read UFS partitions, which means it can boot SunOS/Solaris partitions as well. This is useful if you want to install GNU/Linux alongside an existing SunOS/Solaris install." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3124 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Continue Without Boot Loader" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3126 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This option can be used to complete the installation even when no boot loader is to be installed, either because the arch/subarch doesn't provide one, or because none is desired (e.g. you will use existing boot loader)." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3133 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you plan to manually configure your bootloader, you should check the name of the installed kernel in <filename>/target/boot</filename>. You should also check that directory for the presence of an <firstterm>initrd</firstterm>; if one is present, you will probably have to instruct your bootloader to use it. Other information you will need are the disk and partition you selected for your <filename>/</filename> filesystem and, if you chose to install <filename>/boot</filename> on a separate partition, also your <filename>/boot</filename> filesystem." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3150 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Finishing the Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3151 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This is the last step in the &debian; installation process during which the installer will do any last minute tasks. It mostly consists of tidying up after the &d-i;." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3164 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Setting the System Clock" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3166 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The installer may ask you if the computer's clock is set to UTC. Normally this question is avoided if possible and the installer tries to work out whether the clock is set to UTC based on things like what other operating systems are installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3173 +#, no-c-format +msgid "In expert mode you will always be able to choose whether or not the clock is set to UTC. <phrase arch=\"powerpc\">Macintosh hardware clocks are normally set to local time. If you want to dual-boot, select local time instead of UTC.</phrase> <phrase arch=\"any-x86\">Systems that (also) run Dos or Windows are normally set to local time. If you want to dual-boot, select local time instead of UTC.</phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3184 +#, no-c-format +msgid "At this point &d-i; will also attempt to save the current time to the system's hardware clock. This will be done either in UTC or local time, depending on the selection that was just made." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3199 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Reboot the System" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3201 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You will be prompted to remove the boot media (CD, floppy, etc) that you used to boot the installer. After that the system will be rebooted into your new &debian; system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3207 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After a final prompt the system will be halted because rebooting is not supported on &arch-title;. You then need to IPL &debian-gnu; from the DASD which you selected for the root filesystem during the first steps of the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3220 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Troubleshooting" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3221 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The components listed in this section are usually not involved in the installation process, but are waiting in the background to help the user in case something goes wrong." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3234 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Saving the installation logs" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3236 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If the installation is successful, the logfiles created during the installation process will be automatically saved to <filename>/var/log/installer/</filename> on your new &debian; system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3243 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Choosing <guimenuitem>Save debug logs</guimenuitem> from the main menu allows you to save the log files to a floppy disk, network, hard disk, or other media. This can be useful if you encounter fatal problems during the installation and wish to study the logs on another system or attach them to an installation report." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3263 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Using the Shell and Viewing the Logs" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3265 +#, no-c-format +msgid "There are several methods you can use to get a shell while running an installation. On most systems, and if you are not installing over serial console, the easiest method is to switch to the second <emphasis>virtual console</emphasis> by pressing <keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap></keycombo><footnote> <para> That is: press the <keycap>Alt</keycap> key on the left-hand side of the <keycap>space bar</keycap> and the <keycap>F2</keycap> function key at the same time. </para> </footnote> (on a Mac keyboard, <keycombo><keycap>Option</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap></keycombo>). Use <keycombo><keycap>Left Alt</keycap> <keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo> to switch back to the installer itself." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3283 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For the graphical installer see also <xref linkend=\"gtk-using\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3287 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you cannot switch consoles, there is also an <guimenuitem>Execute a Shell</guimenuitem> item on the main menu that can be used to start a shell. You can get to the main menu from most dialogs by using the &BTN-GOBACK; button one or more times. Type <userinput>exit</userinput> to close the shell and return to the installer." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3295 +#, no-c-format +msgid "At this point you are booted from the RAM disk, and there is a limited set of Unix utilities available for your use. You can see what programs are available with the command <command>ls /bin /sbin /usr/bin /usr/sbin</command> and by typing <command>help</command>. The shell is a Bourne shell clone called <command>ash</command> and has some nice features like autocompletion and history." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3304 +#, no-c-format +msgid "To edit and view files, use the text editor <command>nano</command>. Log files for the installation system can be found in the <filename>/var/log</filename> directory." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3311 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Although you can do basically anything in a shell that the available commands allow you to do, the option to use a shell is really only there in case something goes wrong and for debugging." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3317 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Doing things manually from the shell may interfere with the installation process and result in errors or an incomplete installation. In particular, you should always use let the installer activate your swap partition and not do this yourself from a shell." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3333 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Installation Over the Network" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3335 +#, no-c-format +msgid "One of the more interesting components is <firstterm>network-console</firstterm>. It allows you to do a large part of the installation over the network via SSH. The use of the network implies you will have to perform the first steps of the installation from the console, at least to the point of setting up the networking. (Although you can automate that part with <xref linkend=\"automatic-install\"/>.)" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3345 +#, no-c-format +msgid "This component is not loaded into the main installation menu by default, so you have to explicitly ask for it. If you are installing from CD, you need to boot with medium priority or otherwise invoke the main installation menu and choose <guimenuitem>Load installer components from CD</guimenuitem> and from the list of additional components select <guimenuitem>network-console: Continue installation remotely using SSH</guimenuitem>. Successful load is indicated by a new menu entry called <guimenuitem>Continue installation remotely using SSH</guimenuitem>." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3358 +#, no-c-format +msgid "For installations on &arch-title;, this is the default method after setting up the network." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3363 +#, no-c-format +msgid "<phrase arch=\"not-s390\">After selecting this new entry, you</phrase> <phrase arch=\"s390\">You</phrase> will be asked for a new password to be used for connecting to the installation system and for its confirmation. That's all. Now you should see a screen which instructs you to login remotely as the user <emphasis>installer</emphasis> with the password you just provided. Another important detail to notice on this screen is the fingerprint of this system. You need to transfer the fingerprint securely to the person who will continue the installation remotely." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3375 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Should you decide to continue with the installation locally, you can always press &enterkey;, which will bring you back to the main menu, where you can select another component." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3381 +#, no-c-format +msgid "" + "Now let's switch to the other side of the wire. As a prerequisite, you need to configure your terminal for UTF-8 encoding, because that is what the installation system uses. If you do not, remote installation will be still possible, but you may encounter strange display artefacts like destroyed dialog borders or unreadable non-ascii characters. Establishing a connection with the installation system is as simple as typing: <informalexample><screen>\n" + "<prompt>$</prompt> <userinput>ssh -l installer <replaceable>install_host</replaceable></userinput>\n" + "</screen></informalexample> Where <replaceable>install_host</replaceable> is either the name or IP address of the computer being installed. Before the actual login the fingerprint of the remote system will be displayed and you will have to confirm that it is correct." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3398 +#, no-c-format +msgid "The <command>ssh</command> server in the installer uses a default configuration that does not send keep-alive packets. In principle, a connection to the system being installed should be kept open indefinitely. However, in some situations — depending on your local network setup — the connection may be lost after some period of inactivity. One common case where this can happen is when there is some form of Network Address Translation (NAT) somewhere between the client and the system being installed. Depending on at which point of the installation the connection was lost, you may or may not be able to resume the installation after reconnecting." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3411 +#, no-c-format +msgid "You may be able to avoid the connection being dropped by adding the option <userinput>-o ServerAliveInterval=<replaceable>value</replaceable></userinput> when starting the <command>ssh</command> connection, or by adding that option in your <command>ssh</command> configuration file. Note however that in some cases adding this option may also <emphasis>cause</emphasis> a connection to be dropped (for example if keep-alive packets are sent during a brief network outage, from which <command>ssh</command> would otherwise have recovered), so it should only be used when needed." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3424 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If you install several computers in turn and they happen to have the same IP address or hostname, <command>ssh</command> will refuse to connect to such host. The reason is that it will have different fingerprint, which is usually a sign of a spoofing attack. If you are sure this is not the case, you will need to delete the relevant line from <filename>~/.ssh/known_hosts</filename><footnote> <para> The following command will remove an existing entry for a host: <command>ssh-keygen -R <<replaceable>hostname</replaceable>|<replaceable>IP address</replaceable>></command>. </para> </footnote> and try again." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3440 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After the login you will be presented with an initial screen where you have two possibilities called <guimenuitem>Start menu</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Start shell</guimenuitem>. The former brings you to the main installer menu, where you can continue with the installation as usual. The latter starts a shell from which you can examine and possibly fix the remote system. You should only start one SSH session for the installation menu, but may start multiple sessions for shells." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3450 +#, no-c-format +msgid "After you have started the installation remotely over SSH, you should not go back to the installation session running on the local console. Doing so may corrupt the database that holds the configuration of the new system. This in turn may result in a failed installation or problems with the installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3469 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Loading Missing Firmware" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3470 +#, no-c-format +msgid "As described in <xref linkend=\"hardware-firmware\"/>, some devices require firmware to be loaded. In most cases the device will not work at all if the firmware is not available; sometimes basic functionality is not impaired if it is missing and the firmware is only needed to enable additional features." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3478 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If a device driver requests firmware that is not available, &d-i; will display a dialog offering to load the missing firmware. If this option is selected, &d-i; will scan available devices for either loose firmware files or packages containing firmware. If found, the firmware will be copied to the correct location (<filename>/lib/firmware</filename>) and the driver module will be reloaded." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3488 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Which devices are scanned and which file systems are supported depends on the architecture, the installation method and the stage of the installation. Especially during the early stages of the installation, loading the firmware is most likely to succeed from a FAT-formatted floppy disk or USB stick. <phrase arch=\"x86\">On i386 and amd64 firmware can also be loaded from an MMC or SD card.</phrase>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3498 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Note that it is possible to skip loading the firmware if you know the device will also function without it, or if the device is not needed during the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3506 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Preparing a medium" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3507 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Official CD images do not include non-free firmware. The most common method to load such firmware is from some removable medium such as a USB stick. Alternatively, unofficial CD builds containing non-free firmware can be found at <ulink url=\"&url-firmware-cds;\"></ulink>. To prepare a USB stick (or other medium like a hard drive partition, or floppy disk), the firmware files or packages must be placed in either the root directory or a directory named <filename>/firmware</filename> of the file system on the medium. The recommended file system to use is FAT as that is most certain to be supported during the early stages of the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3520 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Tarballs and zip files containing current packages for the most common firmware are available from: <itemizedlist> <listitem><para> <ulink url=\"&url-firmware-tarballs;\"></ulink> </para></listitem> </itemizedlist> Just download the tarball or zip file for the correct release and unpack it to the file system on the medium." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3534 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If the firmware you need is not included in the tarball, you can also download specific firmware packages from the (non-free section of the) archive. The following overview should list most available firmware packages but is not guaranteed to be complete and may also contain non-firmware packages:" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3548 +#, no-c-format +msgid "It is also possible to copy individual firmware files to the medium. Loose firmware could be obtained for example from an already installed system or from a hardware vendor." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: title +#: using-d-i.xml:3557 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Firmware and the Installed System" +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3558 +#, no-c-format +msgid "Any firmware loaded during the installation will be copied automatically to the installed system. In most cases this will ensure that the device that requires the firmware will also work correctly after the system is rebooted into the installed system. However, if the installed system runs a different kernel version from the installer there is a slight chance that the firmware cannot be loaded due to version skew." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3567 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If the firmware was loaded from a firmware package, &d-i; will also install this package for the installed system and will automatically add the non-free section of the package archive in APT's <filename>sources.list</filename>. This has the advantage that the firmware should be updated automatically if a new version becomes available." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3575 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If loading the firmware was skipped during the installation, the relevant device will probably not work with the installed system until the firmware (package) is installed manually." +msgstr "" + +#. Tag: para +#: using-d-i.xml:3582 +#, no-c-format +msgid "If the firmware was loaded from loose firmware files, the firmware copied to the installed system will <emphasis>not</emphasis> be automatically updated unless the corresponding firmware package (if available) is installed after the installation is completed." +msgstr "" + |